Yamaha RX V867 Owner's Manual
User Manual: Yamaha RX-V867 Owner's Manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .Page Count: 144
Owner’s Manual
AV Receiver
English for U.S.A.
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
Connecting the FM/AM antennas .................................. 33
Features and capabilities ................................................... 4
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically
(YPAO).............................................................................. 34
Using the TV OSD to operate the unit ............................. 5
View or modify content for the current input source
........................................................... 5
Configuring settings for this unit
...................................................... 5
Adjust settings for each input source
................................................................. 6
About this manual............................................................. 7
Supplied accessories......................................................... 7
Part names and functions.................................................. 8
Front panel........................................................................ 8
Rear panel......................................................................... 9
Front panel display ......................................................... 10
Remote control ............................................................... 11
On-screen display ........................................................... 12
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers ........................................................ 13
Speaker channels and functions...................................... 13
Speaker layout ................................................................ 14
Connecting speakers and subwoofers............................. 17
Connecting external components.................................... 21
Jacks and cables.............................................................. 21
Connecting a TV monitor............................................... 22
Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices ............ 25
Connecting game consoles ............................................. 29
Connecting a multi-format player
or an external decoder .................................................... 29
Connecting an external amplifier ................................... 30
Connecting a SCENE link
playback-compatible device ........................................... 30
Using the Trigger function to link
external component power.............................................. 31
Connecting audio/video recording devices..................... 31
Connecting to the network.............................................. 32
PLAYBACK
Basic playback procedure ............................................... 42
Changing input settings with a single key
(SCENE function) ............................................................ 44
Registering input sources/sound program/
HDMI OUT .................................................................... 44
Enjoying favorite sound field effect ............................... 44
Selecting sound programs and sound decoders.............. 44
Sound programs.............................................................. 48
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ .......................... 61
Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner .......................... 61
Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription ........ 62
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations............................. 62
Registering and recalling the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
channels.......................................................................... 63
Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ information .. 64
Navigating the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
from the Content window .............................................. 65
Playing back tunes on the PC......................................... 67
Windows Media Player setup......................................... 67
Playback of PC music contents...................................... 67
Listening to the Internet Radio ...................................... 69
Listening to Internet Radio ............................................ 69
Using the TV display to control this unit....................... 50
Basic operations via the TV screen display ................... 50
Using the Rhapsody® service.......................................... 71
Rhapsody® account sign-in............................................ 71
Playback of Rhapsody® contents................................... 72
Configuring settings specific to an individual input
source (Option menu) ...................................................... 52
Option menu display and setup ...................................... 52
Option menu................................................................... 53
Listening to the SIRIUS Internet Radio........................ 75
SIRIUS Internet Radio account sign-in ......................... 75
Navigating the SIRIUS Internet Radio menu ................ 76
Confirming and operating input sources
from the Content window ............................................... 56
Displaying the Content window on the TV screen......... 56
Switching the display between the Now Playing view
and the Browse view ...................................................... 56
FM/AM tuning ................................................................. 57
Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning)..... 57
Navigating the FM/AM tuner
from the Content window............................................... 59
Using shortcut function................................................... 78
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ ........... 79
Connecting the Universal Dock for iPod ....................... 79
Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™ .................................... 79
Playing iPod/iPhone from the menu screen
(Menu browse control)................................................... 80
Operating basic playback functions
via the remote control (Simple remote control) ............. 81
Playing iPod™/iPhone™ with wireless connection ...... 81
Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components ...... 83
Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver................................................... 83
Pairing Bluetooth™ components ................................... 83
Using Bluetooth™ components ..................................... 84
Changing the friendly name of this unit
by using the web browser................................................ 85
En
2
SETUP
Configuring input sources (Input menu) ....................... 86
Configuring input sources .............................................. 86
Input menu...................................................................... 87
Editing the SCENE function (SCENE menu) ............... 90
Editing a scene................................................................ 90
SCENE menu.................................................................. 91
Setting sound program parameters
(Sound Program menu) ................................................... 93
Editing sound programs.................................................. 93
CINEMA DSP parameters ............................................. 94
Parameters usable in certain sound programs ................ 96
Parameters usable in surround decoder .......................... 97
Setting various functions (Setup menu) ......................... 98
Operating the Setup menu .............................................. 98
Setup menu ..................................................................... 99
Manages settings for speakers ........................................ 99
Setting the audio output function of this unit ............... 103
Setting this unit’s video output function....................... 104
Setting HDMI functions ............................................... 105
Adjusting this unit’s network parameters ..................... 108
Setting this unit’s multi-zone function ......................... 109
Making the receiver easier to use ................................. 109
Language ...................................................................... 112
Confirming information of this unit
(Information menu) ....................................................... 113
Selecting information ................................................... 113
Controlling other components
with the remote control.................................................. 115
Keys connecting external components ......................... 115
Default remote control code settings............................ 116
Registering remote control codes
for external component operations ............................... 116
Resetting all remote control codes ............................... 117
Extended functionality that can be configured
as needed (Advanced Setup menu)............................... 118
Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup menu............. 118
Setting the impedance of speakers .............................. 118
Avoiding crossing remote control signals
when using multiple Yamaha receivers ........................ 119
Resetting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
parental lock code......................................................... 119
Changing TV format .................................................... 120
Removing HDMI video output up-scaling limits......... 120
Initializing various settings for this unit....................... 120
Firmware update........................................................... 120
Firmware version.......................................................... 120
Information on HDMI™............................................... 137
About trademarks ......................................................... 138
Specifications.................................................................. 139
Index ............................................................................... 141
Using the HDMI Control function ............................... 121
Using multi-zone configuration .................................... 125
Connecting Zone2 ........................................................ 125
Controlling Zone2 ........................................................ 126
Using the party mode ................................................... 126
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting ............................................................. 127
General ......................................................................... 127
HDMI™ ....................................................................... 129
Tuner (FM/AM) ........................................................... 130
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™............................................. 130
Network ........................................................................ 131
iPod™/iPhone™ .......................................................... 132
Bluetooth™ .................................................................. 133
Remote control ............................................................. 133
Glossary .......................................................................... 134
Audio information ........................................................ 134
Sound program information ......................................... 135
Video information ........................................................ 136
Video conversion .......................................................... 136
En
3
INTRODUCTION
Features and capabilities
■ Built-in high-quality, high-power 7-channel amplifier
■ 6 HDMI input jacks (5 + 1 VIDEO AUX) supporting Audio Return Channel and 3D
video signal
■ 2 HDMI output jacks
– Selecting the HDMI OUT jack ................................................................................................................42
■ 1-button input/sound program switching (SCENE function)................................44
■ Speaker connections for 2- to 7.1-channel configurations
–
–
–
–
–
–
Speaker impedance configuration............................................................................................................18
Speaker channels and functions ...............................................................................................................13
Speaker layout..........................................................................................................................................14
Speaker cable connection.........................................................................................................................17
Subwoofer cable connection ....................................................................................................................20
High quality playback using bi-amplification connections .....................................................................18
■ Automatic settings for speaker acoustic parameters
(YPAO - Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) ......................................34
■ External component connection (max. 16 inputs) and playback
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
External component connection...............................................................................................................21
Protective cover for front panel jacks ........................................................................................................7
Configuring the settings specific for each input source ................................................52
Playback from external components........................................................................................................42
Playback from an iPod/iPhone with wired connection ............................................................................80
Playback from an iPod/iPhone with wireless connection ........................................................................81
Playback from a Bluetooth component (Bluetooth and components sold separately) ............................83
■ FM/AM tuner
–
–
–
–
Receiving an FM/AM broadcast ..............................................................................................................57
Presetting stations ....................................................................................................................................57
Simple preset tuning ................................................................................................................................57
Changing Audio mode (Auto/Mono).......................................................................................................59
■ Playback and control via network
– Playback of music on the PC and DLNA server......................................................................................67
– Internet radio service playback ................................................................................................................69
– Control this unit via network (Web Browser Control).............................................................................85
■ Multi-channel, multi-format playback
–
–
–
–
Sound field effect selection......................................................................................................................44
Playback without sound field effects .......................................................................................................45
Stereo playback........................................................................................................................................45
Compressed-music playback ...................................................................................................................47
■ Front panel information display/on-screen display (OSD) on the TV screen
– Switching information on the front panel display ...................................................................................10
– Operating this unit using the on-screen display.......................................................................................12
■ Volume adjustment functions
– Easy listening at low volumes < Adaptive DRC> ...................................................................................54
– Adjusting volume between input sources .....................................................................55
■ Remote control operation
– External component operation with this unit’s remote control..............................................................115
■ Playing back the audio source in another room
–
–
–
–
Using the internal amplifier for playback ................................................................................................18
Using the external amplifier for playback .............................................................................................125
Configuring the settings for another room.............................................................................................125
Controlling the external component in another room ............................................................................126
■ Other features
– Standby mode after a specific amount of time .................................................................11
– Charging the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode ..........................89
Most of this unit’s functions can be operated by following instructions displayed on the TV screen.
Refer to “Using the TV OSD to operate the unit” on the following pages for information on
functions that can be controlled using the on-screen display.
■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
– Receiving a channel .................................................................................................................................62
– Presetting channels ..................................................................................................................................63
– Displaying information ............................................................................................................................64
En
4
INTRODUCTION
Using the TV OSD to operate the unit
This unit features a sophisticated on-screen display (OSD) for the TV screen. The OSD is designed to enable visual guidance that simplifies operations. The OSD mainly displays the ON SCREEN and
Option menus, as well as the Content window that displays the content of current input sources.
■ Select an input source, SCENE and sound program
– Select an input source ..............................................................................................................................50
– Select a SCENE .......................................................................................................................................51
– Select a sound program............................................................................................................................51
View or modify content for the current input source
■ Operate the AM/FM tuner or SIRIUS Satellite Radio
– Display a list of preset stations/channels for selection ......................................................................60, 66
– Display information on the station/channel currently received .........................................................59, 65
– Perform operations such as searching for and registering stations/channels using the Utility
.............................................................................................................................................59, 65
■ Display the list of iPod music sources
– Display the list of iPod music sources for selection ................................................................................80
– Perform operations such as play, stop and pause using the TV screen ............80
Configuring settings for this unit
■ Configure an input source
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Select an input source ..............................................................................................................................50
Play the audio/video signal from the selected input source.....................................................................42
Change the input source name ...........................................................................88
Select the audio input jack separately from the video input jack .........................................88
Specify a format for digital audio signals ...................................................................88
Enhance the sound of compressed audio .............................................................................89
Output a video signal input from another input source
while playing a multi-channel audio signal .......................................................................89
– Charge the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode ......................................89
■ Customize a SCENE
– Register or clear settings for a selected SCENE , .........................................................91
– Turn on a Yamaha BD/DVD player or CD player connected to this unit automatically
when a SCENE is selected ................................................................................................91
■ Adjust a sound program (sound program)
– Adjust sound program parameters ...........................................................................................................93
■ Display settings information for this unit
– Display audio signal information ................................................................................113
– Display video signal information ................................................................................113
– Display HDMI signal information ................................................................113
■ Adjust acoustic parameters to match your speakers and listening environment
– Specify speaker acoustic parameters automatically
(Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer - YPAO).......................................................................34
– Set up this unit’s speaker configuration simply ..................................................99
– Specify settings for each speaker ...............................................................................100
– Control volume control for each speaker ................................................................................101
– Apply speaker distance settings .........................................................................................101
– Control equalizer sound quality ................................................................................102
– Adjust test tone speaker ....................................................................................................102
■ Adjust audio signals output from this unit
–
–
–
–
–
Correct lag between audio and video signals ......................................................................103
Select a dynamic range adjustment method ...........................................................103
Specify the maximum volume .....................................................................................103
Specify the initial volume ..........................................................................................104
Adjust DSP effect and volume level ................................................................104
■ Adjust video signals output from this unit
– Convert analog video signal to another type of signal .....................104
– Specify the resolution and aspect ratio of analog video signal converted to HDMI or specify
upscaling resolution for 480i/576i- or 480p/576p-HDMI output signal .........................105
■ HDMI settings
–
–
–
–
Assign the audio input source for the TV ...............................................................106
Listen to TV audio with HDMI cable connection ............................106
Transmit HDMI audio/video to the TV during standby mode .............................107
Change the output destination of HDMI input audio signals .....................................107
Continues to the
next page
En
5
INTRODUCTION
Using the TV OSD to operate the unit
■ Network settings
– Set the IP address of this unit .........................................................................................108
– Accept the commands via LAN network when this unit is in the standby mode
...............................................................................................................................108
– Set the mac address filter for this unit .............................................................108
■ Enable listening in multiple rooms (multi-zone function)
– Adjust Zone2 volume .......................................................................................................109
– Rename each zone ......................................................................................................109
■ Specify other functions for this unit
–
–
–
–
Enter standby mode automatically when no operations are performed ..............110
Adjust the brightness of the front panel display .................................................................110
Change the wall paper displayed on the TV screen ........................................................110
Specify the function of the TRIGGER OUT jack for controlling external components
...................................................................................................................................111
– Prohibit changes to settings .....................................................................................112
■ Select a language
– Change the language displayed on the TV screen ............................................................112
Adjust settings for each input source
–
–
–
–
–
Select the 5.1-channel signal playback method ...................................................55
Adjust bass and treble levels .........................................................................................54
Enable low-volume background music .......................................................................54
Adjust the volume of input sources ...............................................................................55
Adjust the vertical position of dialogues ......................................................................54
En
6
INTRODUCTION
Using the TV OSD to operate the unit
About this manual
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• This manual is created prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and
product, the product has priority.
• “dHDMI1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the
remote control. Refer to the “Remote control” (☞p. 11) for the
information about each position of the parts.
• J1 indicates that the reference is in the footnote. Refer to the
corresponding numbers on the bottom of the page.
• ☞ indicates the page describing the related information.
• Click on the “
” at the bottom of the page to display the
corresponding page in “Part names and functions.”
Front panel
Rear panel
Front panel display
Remote control
Supplied accessories
■ Attaching the VIDEO AUX input cover (supplied)
■ Installing batteries in the remote control
To protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input
cover to the VIDEO AUX jacks when you do not use the jacks.
To remove the cover, push the left section of it.
When inserting batteries in the remote control, remove the
battery compartment cover from the reverse side of the remote
control, and insert two AAA batteries into the battery
compartment so that they match with the polarity markings (+
and -).
a
Battery compartment
cover
b
Attach the cover
Battery compartment
Replace the batteries with new ones if the remote control can
only be operated within a narrow range.
NOTE
PUSH
Check that you received all of the following parts.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Remote control
Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) x 2
YPAO microphone
AM loop antenna
Indoor FM antenna
VIDEO AUX input cover
c
Remove the cover
If there are remote control codes for external components
registered to the remote control, removing the batteries for more
than 2 minutes, or leaving exhausted batteries in the remote
control, may clear the remote control codes. If this should occur,
replace the batteries with new ones, and set the remote control
codes.
En
7
INTRODUCTION
Part names and functions
Front panel
e INFO
a MAIN ZONE A (Power)
f
b
c
d
Switches this unit between on and standby mode.
HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator
Lights up in any of the following cases while the unit is in standby
mode.
• When the Standby Through function is enabled and audio/video from
an external component connected with HDMI is output to a TV
during standby mode (☞p. 107).
• When an iPod/iPhone, which is placed in the Universal Dock for iPod,
is charging while the unit is in standby mode (☞p. 81).
This indicator also lights up when the Yamaha Wireless System for
iPod is connected to this unit (☞p. 81).
• When the Network Standby function is enabled. This function allows
this unit to be turned on by receiving a command over a network
(☞p. 108).
ZONE2
Switches to enable/disable the audio output to Zone2 (☞p. 126).
ZONE CONTROL
Switches to Zone2 operation mode. This unit, or its remote control,
can be used to select input sources or adjust volume for an external
amplifier in another room or the built-in amplifier for speakers in
another room (☞p. 126).
a
b
c d e f
g
h
i
j
k
l INPUT selector
Changes the information displayed on the front panel display
(☞p. 10).
MEMORY
Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (☞p. 57) or SIRIUS
channels as preset channels (☞p. 63). J1
PRESET j / i
Selects an FM/AM preset station (☞p. 59) or a SIRIUS preset channel
(☞p. 64). J1
FM/AM (CATEGORY l / h)
Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM or AM (☞p. 57). J1
Selects a channel category for a SIRIUS (☞p. 63).
Front panel display
Displays information on this unit (☞p. 10).
TUNING/CH jj / ii
Changes FM/AM tuner frequencies (☞p. 57) or SIRIUS Satellite
Radio channels (☞p. 63). J1
PURE DIRECT
Switches this unit to Pure Direct mode (☞p. 47).
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
g
h
PRESET
CATEGORY
ij
t
k
Selects an input source from which to playback. Rotate this selector to
cycle through the input sources in order.
PHONES jack
For plugging headphones in. Sound effects applied during playback
can also be heard through the headphones.
YPAO MIC jack
Connect the supplied YPAO microphone and adjust the speaker balance
automatically (☞p. 34).
TONE CONTROL
Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers/headphones
(☞p. 43).
SCENE
Switches the input source, the sound program, and the HDMI OUT
with a single button (☞p. 44, p. 90). When this unit is in standby
mode, press this key to switch on.
PROGRAM selector
Selects a sound program (☞p. 44). Rotate this selector to cycle
through sound programs.
STRAIGHT
Changes a sound program to straight decoding mode (☞p. 45).
VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting game consoles to this unit temporarily (☞p. 29).
Attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover when not using this jack
(☞p. 7).
VOLUME
Adjusts the volume level.
MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT
ZONE2
ZONE CONTROL
INFO
MEMORY
FM
TUNING/CH
AM
VOLUME
INPUT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
PROGRAM
PHONES
YPAO MIC
TONE CONTROL
SILENT CINEMA
l
m
VIDEO AUX
STRAIGHT
HDMI IN
n
op q
r
VIDEO
s
L
AUDIO
R
t
J 1 : Usable when you have selected TUNER or SIRIUS input.
En
8
INTRODUCTION
Part names and functions
Rear panel
f REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
a DOCK jack
g
b
c
d
e
For connecting an optional Universal Dock for iPod (such as
YDS-12), Wireless System for iPod (YID-W10), or Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) (☞p. 79, p. 81, p. 83).
NETWORK port
For connecting to the network (☞p. 32).
HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks
For connecting an HDMI - compatible TV to output audio/video
signals (☞p. 23).
ANTENNA jacks
For connecting AM and FM antennas (☞p. 33).
MONITOR OUT jacks
VIDEO jack
COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks
h
i
j
k
For connecting a TV capable of receiving video
input, and outputting video signals to it (☞p. 23).
For connecting TV that are compatible with
component video signals, using three cables to
output video signal (☞p. 23).
a
b
DOCK
c
de
l
f
HDMI 1
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
1
m AUDIO1-2 jacks
For connecting an external component that supports the remote
control function (☞p. 30).
HDMI1-5 jacks
For connecting external components equipped with HDMIcompatible outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞p. 25).
SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting the front, center, surround and surround back speakers
(☞p. 17). Connect the presence speakers (☞p. 17) or the speakers for
Zone2 (☞p. 18) to the EXTRA SP jacks.
Power cable
For connecting this unit to an AC wall outlet.
SIRIUS jack
For connecting a SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) (☞p. 61).
AV1-6 jacks
For connecting to external components equipped with audio/video
outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞p. 26).
AV OUT jacks
For outputting audio/video signals received when analog inputs (AV36 or AUDIO1-2) are selected (☞p. 31).
g
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
h
SELECTABLE
HDMI 4
o
p
q
r
i
Distinguishing the input and output jacks
The area around the audio/video output jacks is marked
in white to prevent connection errors. Use these jacks to
output audio/video signals to a TV or other external
component.
HDMI 5
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
n
For connecting external components equipped with analog audio
outputs to input sound into this unit (☞p. 28).
TRIGGER OUT jack
For connecting an external component that supports the trigger
function to operate it linked with operation of this unit (☞p. 31).
MULTI CH INPUT jacks
For connecting a player that supports a multi-channel output
(☞p. 29).
AUDIO OUT jacks
For outputting audio signals received when analog jacks, such as the
AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are selected (☞p. 31).
ZONE2 OUT jacks
Outputs sound of this unit to an external amplifier set in a different
room. (☞p. 125).
PRE OUT terminals
For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or an external
power amplifier (☞p. 20, p. 30).
ARC
SPEAKERS
SIRIUS
EXTRA SP
ANTENNA
FM
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
GND AM
PR
PR
CENTER
SURROUND BACK/
SURROUND
BI-AMP
ZONE2/PRESENCE
REMOTE
IN
HDMI 1
1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI 5
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
SINGLE
OUT
75
PB
2
ARC
SELECTABLE
ARC
PB
SPEAKE
VIDEO
VIDEO
ANTENNA
FM
Y
Y
CENTER
SURROUND BACK/
SURROUND
BI-AMP
REMOTE
PR
+12V
MONITOR OUT
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
GND AM
IN
0.1A MAX.
SINGLE
TRIGGER OUT
OUT
CENTER
SINGLE
75
CENTER
PB
VIDEO
Y
+12V
0.1A MAX.
TRIGGER OUT
CENTER
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(CD)
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
PRE OUT
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
j
k
l m
n o pq
r
SINGLE
CENTER
1 SUBWOOFER 2
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
PRE OUT
1 SUBWOOFER 2
Output jacks
En
9
INTRODUCTION
Part names and functions
g SLEEP indicator
Front panel display
a HDMI indicator
b
c
d
e
f
■ Switching information on the front panel display
Lights up when the sleep timer is on (☞p. 11).
h ZONE2 indicator
Lights up when this unit detects the external component connected to
the HDMI1-5 jacks.
OUT 1/OUT 2 indicators
Indicate which HDMI OUT jack outputs audio/video signals
(☞p. 23).
SIRIUS indicator
Lights up when a SiriusConnect tuner is selected as an input source.
CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when a sound field effect that uses CINEMA DSP
technology is selected.
ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer is active (☞p. 47).
CINEMA DSP 3D indicator
Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D is activated (☞p. 46).
Tuner indicators
Light up according to the status of a received station (☞p. 57).
i
j
k
l
m
Lights up when the audio output to Zone2 is enabled (☞p. 126).
MUTE indicator
Flashes when audio is muted.
VOLUME indicator
Displays the current volume level.
Cursor indicators
Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are available
for operations.
Multi information display
Displays a range of information on menu items and settings.
Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
Subwoofer
Presence speaker L
Front speaker L
Surround speaker L
Surround back
speaker L
The front panel can display sound programs and surround
decoder names as well as the active input source.
Press fINFO repeatedly to cycle through displayed
informations. J2
Input source name
HDMI1
VOL.
STRAIGHT
SW
C
L
R
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Sound program (DSP program)
Center speaker
SW
PL
PR
C
L
R
SL
SR
SBL SB SBR
Presence speaker R
Front speaker R
Surround speaker R
Surround back
speaker R
Surround back
speaker J1
a
b
SIRIUS
c
d
f
ENHANCER
STEREO
3 TUNED
OUT 1 OUT 2
k
e
g hi
SLEEP
ZONE
2
j
VOL.
MUTE
SW
PL
PR
C
L
R
SL
SR
SBL SB SBR
l
k
m
J 1 : “SB” is displayed when using a 6.1-channel configuration only.
J 2 : During FM/AM reception, the frequency is displayed instead of the input source. During SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals reception, the channel is displayed instead of the input source.
En
10
INTRODUCTION
Part names and functions
a Remote control signal transmitter
Remote control
h PARTY
Transmits infrared signals.
Switches the party mode on and off (☞p. 126).
b MAIN/ZONE2
Switches the zone to be operated by the remote control between the
Main zone and Zone2 (☞p. 126).
a
MAIN
ZONE 2
CODE SET
b
o
p
q
SOURCE RECEIVER
c
2
3
V-AUX
d Input selector
1
2
4
1
2
3
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
HDMI1-5 jacks
Front panel VIDEO AUX jacks
AUDIO1-2 jacks
AV1-6 jacks
Rhapsody service, SIRIUS internet radio, internet
radio, or a PC connected to the NETWORK port.
MULTI CH INPUT jacks
A Universal Dock for iPod, Wireless System for
iPod, or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
connected to the DOCK jack.
FM/AM tuner
A SIRIUS tuner connected to the SIRIUS jack.
HDMI OUT
TUNER
r
NET
SIRIUS
CATEGORY
e
FM
f
INFO
TUN./CH
MEMORY
TUNER
SIRIUS
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
g
h
SLEEP
PARTY
i
BD
DVD
TV
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
s
CD
t
VOLUME
ENTER
k
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
RETURN
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
m
FM
AM
(CATEGORY D / E)
MEMORY
PRESET F / G
TUN./CH H / I
v
Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM.
Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM.
Selects a channel category for a SIRIUS.
Presets radio stations.
Selects a preset station.
Changes tuning frequencies or SIRIUS Satellite
Radio channels.
Cycles the information displayed on the front panel display (the name
of the currently selected input source, the sound program, the
surround decoder, the FM/AM tuner frequency, etc.).
HOLD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
TV
ENT
g SLEEP
Switches this unit to standby mode automatically after a specified
period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press this key repeatedly to
set the time for the sleep timer function.
INPUT
n
TV VOL
TV CH
Sleep 120min.
Sleep 90min.
MUTE
Sleep Off
Cursor B / C / D / E Select menu items and change settings when
menus, etc, are displayed.
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen when menus are
displayed, or close the menu.
l External component operation keys
Operate recording, playback, and menu displays etc. for external
components (☞p. 115).
m Numeric keys
Enter numbers.
n TV control keys
Operate a monitor such as a TV.
o CODE SET
f INFO
REC
l
u
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
e Radio control keys
Operates the FM/AM tuner. These keys are used when using the tuner
input.
SCENE
j
MULTI CH INPUT
DOCK
AM
PRESET
Turns on and off the ON SCREEN menu.
k Cursor B / C / D / E, ENTER, RETURN
HDMI1-5
V-AUX
AUDIO1-2
AV1-6
NET
AV
Switch the input source and the sound program with a single button
(☞p. 44). When this unit is in standby mode, press this key to switch on.
j ON SCREEN
Switches an external component on and off.
4
AUDIO
5
c SOURCE A (SOURCE Power)
Select an input source on this unit from which to playback.
HDMI
1
d
i SCENE
Sleep 30min.
Sleep 60min.
Sets remote control codes for external component operations
(☞p. 116).
p SOURCE/RECEIVER
Switches remote control key function to operate this unit or an
external component (☞p. 115). Operate an external component when
this key glows green, or this unit when this key glows orange.
q RECEIVER A (RECEIVER Power)
Switches this unit between on and standby mode.
r HDMI OUT
Switches the output jack connected to an HDMI compatible TV (☞p. 42).
s Sound selection keys
Switch between the sound field effect (sound program) you are using
and the surround decoder (☞p. 44).
t OPTION
Turns on and off the Option menu (☞p. 52).
u VOLUME +/Adjust the volume level (☞p. 42).
v MUTE
Turns the mute function of the sound output on and off (☞p. 42).
The SLEEP indicator lights up when the sleep timer is on.
En
11
INTRODUCTION
Part names and functions
On-screen display
When a TV is connected to this unit, the supplied remote control can be used to specify and verify this
unit’s settings via menus and options displayed on the TV screen.
The following displays are available in the on-screen display.
Content window
ON SCREEN menu
Press jON SCREEN to display the ON
SCREEN menu.
Press dInput selector to display the
Content window.
Detailed settings for this unit can be
configured. Use this menu to select desired
settings, change their values, or check the
current status of this unit.
Refer to “SETUP” (☞p. 86) for details.
Includes the Browse view and the Now
Playing view. The Now Playing view displays
the status of the source from which music is
currently played back. Adjust settings for
music content from the Browse view.
Refer to “Confirming and operating input
sources from the Content window” (☞p. 56)
for details.
Option menu
Press tOPTION to display the Option menu.
Configure the optional settings for each input
source. Settings such as “Tone Control” and
“Volume Trim” are applied to this unit
regardless of the input source.
Refer to “Configuring settings specific to an
individual input source (Option menu)”
(☞p. 52) for details.
En
12
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
This unit uses acoustic field effects and sound decoders to bring you the impact of a real movie theater or concert hall. These effects will be brought to you with ideal speaker positioning and
connections in your listening environment.
Speaker channels and functions
■ Front left and right speakers
The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds (stereo
sound) and effect sounds.
■ Surround left and right speakers
■ Surround back left and right speakers
The surround speakers are for effect and vocal sounds when
playing back a 5.1-channel source or higher. If used with no
surround back speaker when playing back a 6.1-channel source or
higher (including a surround back channel), the sound of the
surround back channel is distributed between the left and right
surround speakers.
The surround back speakers are for rear effect sounds when
playing back a 6.1-channel source or higher. If used with only one
surround back speaker when playing back a 7.1-channel source or
higher, the sound of the left and right surround back channel is
mixed and output from a single speaker.
E.g.
E.g.
Front speaker layout:
Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening
position in the front of the room. When using a projector screen,
the appropriate top positions of the speakers are about 1/4 of the
screen from the bottom.
E.g.
Surround speaker layout:
Place the speakers at the rear of the room on the left and right sides
facing the listening position. They should be placed between 60
degrees and 80 degrees from the listening position and with the
speaker tops at a height of 4.9 – 5.9 ft. (1.5 – 1.8 m) from the floor.
■ Presence left and right speakers
■ Center speaker
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals,
etc.).
The presence speakers are used for front effect sounds. When used
in combination with the sound programs (☞p. 44), a sound with a
richer and more spatial presence is possible.
Surround back speaker layout:
When used with 7.1ch sound, arrange the left and right speakers
towards the listening position, to the rear of the listening position.
Arrange the left and right speakers at least 1 ft. (30 cm) apart. The
same separation as with the front left and right speakers is optimum.
When used with 6.1ch sound, arrange these to the rear of the
listening position.
■ Subwoofer
The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and low-frequency
effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital and DTS. Use a
subwoofer that is equipped with built-in amplifier.
E.g.
Center speaker layout:
Place it halfway between the left and right front speakers. When
using a TV, place the speaker just above or just under the center of
the TV with the front surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned.
When using a screen, place it just under the center of the screen.
E.g.
Presence speaker layout:
Place the left and right presence speakers 1.6 – 3.3 ft. (0.5 – 1 m) to
the outside of the left and right front speakers respectively. The
tops of the presence speakers should be 5.9 ft. (1.8 m) above the
floor.
E.g.
Subwoofer speaker layout:
Place it to the outside of the front left and right speakers facing
slightly inward to reduce echoes from the wall. You can use one or
two subwoofers.
En
13
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
Speaker layout
■ Enjoying the 7.1 channel audio source
■ 7.1-channel speaker layout (7 speakers + subwoofer)
In addition to the 7.1-channel speaker layout, a variety of speaker configurations can be specified with
presence speaker connection, bi-amp connection or the Zone2 function.
And, this unit is equipped with “Power Amp Assign” function which can easily apply the appropriate
speaker setting to this unit according to your speaker configuration.
Front R speaker
Subwoofer
Front L speaker
Surround R speaker
■ Connection of speakers
Connect the speakers to the appropriate jacks shown in the table for each speaker layout. Refer to
“Connecting speakers and subwoofers” (☞p. 17) for details on connecting speakers.
You can also use two subwoofers by connecting them to both SUBWOOFER1 and SUBWOOFER2
jacks. In this case, monaural sound of subwoofer channel is output from both speakers.
■ Assigning a speaker configuration
Center speaker
A speaker configuration must be assigned to this unit to activate the speakers. Use the Power Amp
Assign function to apply the appropriate settings shown in the table for each speaker layout. Refer to
“Power Amp Assign” (☞p. 99) for details on setting.
12 in (30 cm)
or more
Surround L speaker
Surround back L speaker J1
Surround back R speaker
Audio from a 7.1-channel audio source can be played back with no degradation with this speaker
configuration.
■ Connections of speakers
FRONT jacks
Front L/R speakers
SURROUND BACK jacks
Surround back L/R speakers
CENTER jack
Center speaker
SUBWOOFER
(PRE OUT) jack
Subwoofer
SURROUND jacks
Surround L/R speakers
■ Assigning a speaker configuration
Power Amp Assign
7ch Normal (Default)
J 1 : The sound of surround back channel can also be output from a single surround back speaker. When only one surround back
speaker is used, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (SINGLE) jack and place it directly behind the listening position.
En
14
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
■ Adding the presence speakers for a richer sound field effect
■ Enjoying the audio source without surround back speakers
■ Presence speaker layout (7 speakers + subwoofer + presence speakers)
■ 5.1-channel speaker layout (5 speakers + subwoofer)
Front R speaker
Presence R speaker
Front R speaker
Front L speaker
Front L speaker
Subwoofer
Surround R speaker
Subwoofer
Surround R speaker
Presence L speaker
Center speaker
Surround L speaker
Center speaker
Surround back R speaker
Surround back L speaker J1
12 in (30 cm) or
more
Surround L speaker
This unit automatically selects the presence speakers or surround back speakers to output sounds
according to the selected sound program.
When the sound program is changed, the speakers that output the sound are switched between the
presence speakers and surround back speakers automatically. J2
This unit can mix 7.1-channel audio source down to 5.1-channel sound. This enables 7.1-channel
sound without surround back speakers.
■ Connections of speakers
■ Connections of speakers
FRONT jacks
Front L/R speakers
SURROUND BACK jacks
Surround back L/R speakers
CENTER jack
Center speaker
SUBWOOFER
(PRE OUT) jack
Subwoofer
SURROUND jacks
Surround L/R speakers
EXTRA SP jacks
Presence L/R speakers
■ Assigning a speaker configuration
Power Amp Assign
FRONT jacks
Front L/R speakers
SURROUND jacks
Surround L/R speakers
CENTER jack
Center speaker
SUBWOOFER
(PRE OUT) jack
Subwoofer
■ Assigning a speaker configuration
Power Amp Assign
7ch Normal (Default)
7ch Normal (Default)
J 1 : The sound of surround back channel can also be output from a single surround back speaker. When only one surround back
speaker is used, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (SINGLE) jack and place it directly behind the listening position.
J 2 : Sound cannot be output from the surround back speakers when it is output from the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP
jacks.
En
15
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
■ Using the front speakers that support bi-amp connections for a
■ Using speakers in two rooms (Zone2 function)
■ 5.1-channel speaker layout (Front speakers (Bi-amp) + 3 speakers)
■ 7.1-channel speaker layout + Zone2 (7 speakers (in main zone) + subwoofer (in
main zone) + front speakers (in secondary zone))
high quality sound
Front R speaker
(Bi-amp connection)
Front L speaker
(Bi-amp connection)
Main zone
Subwoofer
Zone2
Front R speaker
Front L speaker
Subwoofer
Surround R speaker
Center speaker
Surround R speaker
Front L speaker
Center speaker
Surround L speaker
12 in (30 cm)
or more
Surround L speaker
Using the front speakers that support bi-amp connections reproduces a high quality sound.
■ Connections of speakers
FRONT jacks
Front L/R speakers
(bi-amp)
SURROUND BACK jacks
Front L/R speakers (bi-amp)
CENTER jack
Center speaker
SUBWOOFER
(PRE OUT) jack
Subwoofer
SURROUND jacks
Surround L/R speakers
Surround back L speaker J1
Surround back R
speaker
In addition to the main room, speakers in another room can also be controlled.
When the built-in amplifier assigned to speakers in another room is turned on, sound output
automatically switches from the surround back speakers to the speakers in the other room. J2
■ Connections of speakers
FRONT jacks
Front L/R speakers
SURROUND BACK jacks
Surround back L/R speakers
CENTER jack
Center speaker
SUBWOOFER
(PRE OUT) jack
Subwoofer
SURROUND jacks
Surround L/R speakers
EXTRA SP jacks
Zone2 speakers
■ Assigning a speaker configuration
Power Amp Assign
Front R speaker
5ch BI-AMP
■ Assigning a speaker configuration
Power Amp Assign
7ch + 1ZONE
J 1 : The sound of surround back channel can also be output from a single surround back speaker. When only one surround back
speaker is used, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (SINGLE) jack and place it directly behind the listening position.
J 2 : Sound cannot be output from the surround back speakers when it is output from the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP
jacks.
En
16
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
Connecting speakers and subwoofers
Connect your speakers to their respective terminals on the rear panel.
CAUTION
• Remove the AC power cable of this unit from the power outlet before connecting the speakers.
• Generally speaker cables consist of two parallel insulated cables. One of these cables is a different color, or has a line running along it, to indicate different polarity. Insert the different colored (or lined) cable into the “+”
(positive, red) terminal on this unit and the speakers, and the other cable into the “–” (negative, black) terminal.
• Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch anything or come into contact with the metal areas of this unit. This may damage this unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “CHECK SP
WIRES!” will appear on the front panel display when this unit is switched on.
■ Front/Center/Surround/Surround back speaker and
Subwoofer connection
When connecting only one surround back speaker, connect the
speaker to the SURROUND BACK L (SINGLE) jacks.
Front speaker
R
Surround
speaker
L
R
■ Presence speaker connection
When using the presence speakers, connect the speakers to the
EXTRA SP jacks as shown in the diagram below.
Presence speaker
Surround back
speaker
L
R
The presence speakers (PL/PR) that output front effect sounds can
be connected to this unit. With the sound programs (☞p. 48),
sound with a richer and more spatial presence can be created.
R
L
L
1.8 m
MI 1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI 5
DVD)
MI 5
SPEAKERS
EXTRA SP
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND BACK/
SURROUND
BI-AMP
SPEA
EXTRA SP
ZONE2/PRESENCE
SURROUND BACK/
SURROUND
BI-AMP
REMOTE
IN
SINGLE
OUT
SINGLE
ZONE2/PRESENCE
0.5 – 1 m
0.5 – 1 m
PL
PR
FL
FR
1.8 m
• Connection of presence speakers is recommended to take full
advantage of the effects of CINEMA DSP sound programs.
• Although you can connect both surround back speakers and
presence speakers to this unit, you cannot output sounds from
those speakers at the same time.
+12V
0.1A MAX.
TRIGGER OUT
CENTER
SINGLE
CENTER
SINGLE
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
Center speaker
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
PRE OUT
1
CENTER
WOOFER 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
PRE OUT
1 SUBWOOFER 2
Continues to the
next page
Subwoofer
En
17
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
■ Bi-amp connection
This unit can be connected to speakers that support bi-amp
connections. When connecting speakers, connect the FRONT jacks
and the SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks as in the diagram
below. Configure the bi-amp settings to activate connections.
■ Changing speaker impedance
■ Multi-zone audio system using the internal
amplifier of this unit
Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP jacks as
in the diagram below.
1
2
EXTRA SP
ZONE2/PRESENCE
Zone2
FRONT
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
NETWORK
DOCK
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
SINGLE
1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI 5
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
SELECTABLE
ARC
SPEAKERS
SIRIUS
EXTRA SP
ANTENNA
FM
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
CENTER
SURROUND BACK/
SURROUND
BI-AMP
ZONE2/PRESENCE
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
PR
This unit is configured for 8 Ω speakers at the factory setting.
When connecting to 6 Ω speakers, carry out the following
procedure to switch to 6 Ω. When this unit is configured for 6 Ω
speakers, 4 Ω speakers can also be used as the front speakers.
Switch this unit to the standby mode.
Press MAIN ZONE A while pressing and holding
STRAIGHT on the front panel.
Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on
the front panel display.
After approximately a few seconds, the top menu item is
displayed. J1
IN
SINGLE
OUT
75
PB
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
Y
+12V
MONITOR OUT
0.1A MAX.
TRIGGER OUT
CENTER
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(CD)
NETWORK
DOCK
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
SELECTABLE
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
PRE OUT
CENTER
1 SUBWOOFER 2
CAUTION
HDMI 5
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
OPTICAL
SINGLE
ARC
MAIN ZONE A
MAIN ZONE
SPEAKERS
SIRIUS
EXTRA SP
ANTENNA
FM
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
CENTER
SURROUND BACK/
SURROUND
BI-AMP
ZONE2/PRESENCE
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
PR
IN
SINGLE
OUT
75
PB
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
Y
+12V
MONITOR OUT
0.1A MAX.
TRIGGER OUT
CENTER
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(CD)
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
SINGLE
AUDIO
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
PRE OUT
CENTER
1 SUBWOOFER 2
NOTES
• Before making bi-amplification connections, remove any
brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to
the instruction manuals of speakers for details. When not making
bi-amplification connections, make sure that the brackets or
cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables.
• If connecting a bi-amp, then surround back speakers cannot be
used.
The EXTRA SP jacks of this unit should not be connected to a
Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker
per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple
speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance
load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for
correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all
channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found
on the back panel of this unit.
ZONE2
ZONE CONTROL
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INPUT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
PROGRAM
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
YPAO MIC
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
H
STRAIGHT
Continues to the
next page
J 1 : Refer to the “Extended functionality that can be configured as needed
(Advanced Setup menu)” (☞p. 118) for details on the Advanced Setup menu.
En
18
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
3
Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front panel.
SPIMP.-8MIN
4
5
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select a “6ΩMIN.”
■ Connecting speakers
This type of jack can connect to the following speakers or
connection.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Front L/R speakers
Center speaker
Surround L/R speakers
Surround back L/R speakers
Presence L/R speakers
Zone2 speakers
Bi-amp connection (Front L/R speakers)
4
Tighten the terminal.
Connecting the banana plug
Tighten the knob, and then insert the banana plug into the end of
the terminal.
FR
ON
T
Banana plug
Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then
switch it on again.
The power turns on, when the settings you made has been
configured.
2
3
FR
ON
T
1
4
1
Remove approximately 0.4 in. (10 mm) of insulation
from the ends of the speaker cables, and twist the
bare wires of the cables together firmly so that they
will not cause short circuits.
2
3
Loosen the speaker terminals.
Insert the bare wire of the speaker cable into the gap
on the side of the terminal.
En
19
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
■ Connecting subwoofers
1
Connect the subwoofer input jack to the
SUBWOOFER 1 or 2 jack on this unit with an audio
pin cable.
2
Set the subwoofer volume as follows.
Volume: Set to approximately half volume (or slightly less than
half).
Crossover frequency (if available): Set to maximum.
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
MAX
Subwoofer examples
NOTE
After connection, applying this setting to this unit is required to
activate all speaker connections. With using “Power Amp
Assign” function, you can easily apply the speaker
configuration.
Refer to “Power Amp Assign” (☞p. 99) for details on using
“Power Amp Assign” function.
En
20
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
Jacks and cables
VIDEO jacks
This unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for
components that you are going to connect.
These jacks transmit conventional analog video
signals.
Use video pin cables.
■ Audio/Video jacks
Video pin cable
HDMI jacks
Digital video and digital sound are transmitted through a single jack.
Only use an HDMI cable.
HDMI cable
■ Audio jacks
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo.
• We recommend using a cable less than 16.4 ft. (5.0 m) long to prevent signal quality degradation.
• When a TV that supports HDMI functions and Audio Return Channel function is connected, audio
output from the TV can be input to this unit (☞p. 123).
• When a player and TV that support the 3D video format are connected to this unit, 3D content can be
played back.
• If you connect this unit to a component that has a DVI jack, an HDMI/DVI-D cable is required.
■ Analog video jacks
OPTICAL jacks
COAXIAL jacks
These jacks transmit optical digital audio signals.
Use fiber-optic cables for optical digital audio
signals.
These jacks transmit coaxial digital audio signals.
Use pin cables for digital audio signals.
Digital audio fiber-optic cable
Digital audio pin cable
AUDIO jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
The signal is separated into three components:
luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR).
Use component video pin cables with three plugs.
Component video pin cable
These jacks transmit conventional analog audio
signals.
Use stereo pin cables, connecting the red plug to
the red R jack, and the white plug to the white L
jack.
Stereo pin cable
En
21
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
Connecting a TV monitor
When connecting to a non-HDMI compatible TV
This unit is equipped with the following three types of output jack for connection to a TV.
HDMI OUT 1-2, COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO. Select the proper connection according to the
input signal format supported by your TV.
Connect to the TV using the same type of connection that you used to connect to the external
component, and change the inputs on your TV to match that of the external component you are using
for playback. If the external component and TV are equipped with different types of analog video
jacks, this unit will convert the video signal to component video signal, or vice-versa, according to the
type of video input jacks used by the TV. J2, J3
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks (MONITOR OUT)
DOCK
NETWORK
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
1
HDMI
(BD/DVD)
Input
Output
HDMI
HDMI
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Component
video input
2
ARC
SELECTABLE
TV
ARC
SIRIUS
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
PR
IN
VIDEO
Video input
OUT
75
PB
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
Y
+12V
MONITOR OUT
0.1A MAX.
TRIGGER OUT
VIDEO jack
(MONITOR OUT)
Through
Converted
When connecting to an HDMI compatible TV
Video signal such as component video and video received by this unit is converted to HDMI and output to
the TV. Just select HDMI input on the TV to view video from any external source connected to this unit. J1
Input
Output
HDMI
HDMI
TV
HDMI input
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
Through
Converted
J 1 : You can change the resolution and aspect ratio when converting to HDMI to suit your requirements (☞p. 105).
J 2 : Set “Analog to Analog Conversion” to “On” (☞p. 104).
J 3 : Analog to analog conversion is available only for 480i/576i-resolution video signal.
En
22
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
■ Connecting an HDMI video monitor
■ Connecting a component video monitor J1
Connect the HDMI cable to one of the HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks.
Connect the component video cable to the COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jacks.
HDMI input
Component video input
HDMI
HDMI
DOCK
NETWORK
1
COMPONENT
VIDEO
ARC
(BD/DVD)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
2
SELECTABLE
PR
ANTENNA
TV
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
1
ARC
SELECTABLE
SIRIUS
HDMI
NETWORK
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
DOCK
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
PR
PR
PR
ARC
RE
GND AM
PB
IN
Y
OUT
SIRIUS
75
PB
ANTENNA
HDMI
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
COMPONENT
VIDEO
GND AM
VIDEO
Y
Y
Y
PR
PR
PB
PB
VIDEO
RE
IN
OR OUT
TRIGG
TV
OUT
75
PB
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
Y
MONITOR OUT
TRIGG
HDMI
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(CD)
OPTICAL
AV
OUT
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
FRONT
AUDIO 1
SURROU
MULT
AUDIO 2
HDMI
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(CD)
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROU
MULT
■ Connecting a video monitor J1
Projector
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo.
• We recommend using a cable less than 16.4 ft. (5.0 m) long to prevent signal quality degradation.
• When a TV that supports the HDMI function and Audio Return Channel function is connected, audio
output from the TV can be input to this unit (☞p. 123).
• When a player and TV that support the 3D video format are connected to this unit, 3D content can be
played back.
• This unit is equipped with HDMI OUT 1 and 2 jacks. The active HDMI OUT jack(s) can be selected
(☞p. 42). The active HDMI OUT jack(s) can be registered with the SCENE function (☞p. 44).
Connect the video pin cable to the VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack.
DOCK
HDMI 1
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
1
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
SELECTABLE
ARC
Video input
SIRIUS
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
RE
GND AM
PR
PR
IN
OUT
75
PB
PB
VIDEO
V
VIDEO
Y
Y
MONITO
TRIGG
TV
V
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(CD)
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROU
MULT
J 1 : When connecting to a TV that supports HDMI input, the video signal for the COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO jacks is
converted and output from HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks. When connecting to a TV via the HDMI jack, you do not need to use these
jacks.
En
23
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
■ Listening to TV audio
To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect as followings according to the TV:
When using a TV that supports the Audio Return Channel function and HDMI
Control function
When your TV supports both HDMI Control (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link) and Audio Return
Channel functions, audio/video output from the unit to the TV and audio output from the TV to the
unit are possible using a single HDMI cable.
The input source is switched automatically to match operations carried out on the TV, and that
makes TV sound control easier to use.
For the connections and settings, refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio Return
Channel function” (☞p. 123).
When using a TV that supports the HDMI Control functions
When using a TV that supports HDMI Control functions (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link), if HDMI
Control functions are enabled on the unit, then input source can be switched automatically to match
operations carried out on the TV.
For the connections and settings, refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically
when listening to TV audio” (☞p. 122).
When using other TVs
To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2 jacks to the TV’s audio
output jacks.
TV audio output
Connection
Optical digital audio output
Connect to the OPTICAL jack of the AV1 or AV4 with a fiber-optic cable.
Coaxial digital audio output
Connect to the COAXIAL jack of the AV2 or AV3 with a digital audio pin
cable.
Analog stereo output
Connect to one of the AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2 with a stereo pin
cable.
Select the input source connected via TV’s audio output jack to enjoy the TV sound.
If the TV supports optical digital audio output, we recommend that you connect the TV audio output
to the receiver’s AV4 jack.
Connecting to AV4 allows you to switch the input source to AV4 with just a single key operation
using the SCENE function (☞p. 44).
Available input jacks
Audio output
(Optical, coaxial, or analog)
DOCK
NETWORK
COAXIAL
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
1
AUDIO
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
OPTICAL
SELECTABLE
ARC
SIRIUS
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
RE
GND AM
PR
PR
IN
OUT
75
PB
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
TV
Y
Y
MONITOR OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(CD)
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
TRIGG
SURROU
MULT
You can control your TV using the receiver’s remote control by entering the TV’s remote control
code (☞p. 116).
En
24
CONNECTIONS
MAIN
Connecting external components
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
4
This unit has the following input jacks. Connect them to the appropriate output jacks on
the playback devices such as BD/DVD players.
AUDIO
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
Input
Video input
Audio input
HDMI OUT
HDMI1
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI2
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI3
HDMI
HDMI
■ Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals
from a jack other than HDMI
This unit can use the AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2 input jacks to receive audio signals from
other input jacks.
For example, if a playback device cannot produce audio signals from an HDMI jack,
use the following method to change the audio input.
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
HDMI4
HDMI
HDMI
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
HDMI5
HDMI
HDMI
DOCK
H
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
1
HDMI/Audio (Optical)
output
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
SELECTABLE
ARC
SIRIUS
HDMI
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
j
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
AV1
Component video
Optical digital
AV2
Component video
Coaxial digital
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
PR
SCENE
IN
OUT
75
PB
HDMI
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
HDMI
Y
Y
+12V
MONITOR OUT
OPTICAL
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
k
AV3
Video
Coaxial digital
AV4
Video
Optical digital
O
OPTICAL
Video
Analog (Stereo)
AV6
Video
Analog (Stereo)
AUDIO1
—
Analog (Stereo)
AUDIO2
—
Analog (Stereo)
VIDEO AUX
HDMI/Video
HDMI/Analog (Stereo)
HDMI
Connect the device with an HDMI cable to one of the HDMI1-5 jacks. The HDMI IN
jack on the front panel can also be used.
Select the HDMI input (HDMI1-5 or VIDEO AUX) that the playback device is
connected to for playback.
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
SELECTABLE
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
HDMI output
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FRONT
HDMI
CENTER
SURROUND
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
IN
OUT
75
HDMI
PB
VIDEO
HDMI
Y
+12V
MONITOR OUT
0.1A MAX.
TRIGGER OUT
CENTER
BD/DVD player
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
SINGLE
AUDIO
OUT
COAXIAL
AV 2
AV 3
ZONE2
OUT
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SU
MULTI CH IN
BD/DVD player
■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV5
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
0.1A MAX
TRIGGER OUT
O
FRONT
SURROUND
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press jON SCREEN to display the ON SCREEN menu.
Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select “Input,” and then press
kENTER. J1
Press kCursor D / E repeatedly to select the desired HDMI input
source, and then press kCursor B.
Press kCursor C repeatedly to select “Audio In,” and then press k
ENTER.
Press kCursor B / C to select the audio input source.
Once you have completed the setup, press jON SCREEN to close
the menu.
SUR.BAC
PRE OU
J 1 : Refer to the “Configuring input sources (Input menu)” (☞p. 86) for details on selecting the input source.
En
25
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with component
video cables
Connect the device with a component video cable to one of the AV1-2 input jacks.
■ Component connections to analog audio output devices
Component video / Audio
output
Using optical digital audio output sources
Select the AV1 input to which the playback device is connected for playback.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
DOCK
HDMI 1
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
1
H
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
PR
SELECTABLE
ARC
SIRIUS
PB
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
Y
Component video / Audio (Optical)
output
PR
COMPONENT
VIDEO
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
PR
IN
OUT
AUDIO
DOCK
HDMI OUT
1
PB
PB
Y
Y
75
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
HDMI 1
NETWORK
L
(BD/DVD)
Y
+12V
MONITOR OUT
2
ARC
SELECTABLE
0.1A MAX
TRIGGER OUT
R
ARC
L
COMPONENT
SIRIUS
R
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
FM
PR
PR
PB
PB
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(CD)
RE
GND AM
PR
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SU
MULTI CH IN
IN
PB
OUT
75
Y
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
Game console
Y
Y
MONITOR OUT
OPTICAL
TRIGG
O
O
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 2
AV 3
(CD)
OPTICAL
AV 5
FRONT
AV
OUT
( TV )
AV 4
AV 6
AUDIO 1
SURROU
MULT
AUDIO 2
BD/DVD player
Using coaxial digital audio output sources
Select the AV2 input to which the playback device is connected for playback.
Component video / Audio (Coaxial)
output
DOCK
HDMI 1
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
1
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
COMPONENT
VIDEO
The video input from the AV1-2 jacks can be used in combination with the audio input from other
AV inputs or AUDIO1-2.
When connecting these devices, select the AV input jacks or the AUDIO1-2 jacks as the audio input
for AV1 or AV2. Refer to “Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals from a
jack other than HDMI” (☞p. 25) for detailed setup guidance.
For playback of the connected device, select the AV input source (AV1-2) to which the device is
connected with the component video cable.
SELECTABLE
ARC
SIRIUS
ANTENNA
PR
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
RE
GND AM
PR
PR
PR
IN
PB
OUT
PB
Y
75
PB
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
Y
Y
MONITOR OUT
COAXIAL
TRIGG
C
C
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 1
AV 3
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROU
MULT
BD/DVD player
En
26
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with video cables
Connect the playback device with a video pin cable to one of the AV3-6 input jacks.
Using analog stereo audio output sources
Select the AV5 or AV6 input to which the playback device is connected for playback.
Using optical digital audio output sources
Select the AV4 input to which the playback device is connected for playback.
DOCK
NETWORK
NETWORK
Video / Audio
output
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
(BD/DVD)
SELECTABLE
ANTENNA
SELECTABLE
V
ANTENNA
PR
VIDEO
V
Y
AUDIO
PB
VIDEO
V
Y
Y
MONITOR OUT
TRIGG
L
L
PB
VIDEO
V
75
PB
IN
OUT
75
VIDEO
IN
OUT
VIDEO
RE
GND AM
PR
PB
PR
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
RE
GND AM
VIDEO
ARC
SIRIUS
Video / Audio (Optical)
output
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
2
ARC
ARC
SIRIUS
FM
1
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
DOCK
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
1
R
R
Y
MONITOR OUT
TRIGG
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(CD)
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROU
MULT
O
O
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
OPTICAL
AV
OUT
(CD)
AV 5
AV 6
FRONT
AUDIO 1
SURROU
MULT
AUDIO 2
BD/DVD player
BD/DVD player
Using coaxial digital audio output sources
Select the AV3 input to which the playback device is connected for playback.
DOCK
NETWORK
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
1
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
SELECTABLE
ARC
SIRIUS
Video / Audio (Coaxial)
output
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
RE
GND AM
PR
PR
IN
OUT
75
PB
VIDEO
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
V
V
Y
Y
MONITOR OUT
TRIGG
COAXIAL
C
C
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROU
MULT
BD/DVD player
En
27
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
■ Connecting CD players and other audio devices
Using coaxial digital output sources
Select the AV input (AV2 or AV3) to which the playback device is connected for playback.
Using analog stereo output sources
Select the audio input (AUDIO1-2) to which the playback device is connected for playback.
DOCK
HDMI 1
NETWORK
2
ARC
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
1
SELECTABLE
ARC
HDMI 1
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
1
(BD/DVD)
SIRIUS
2
ARC
SELECTABLE
ANTENNA
ARC
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
SIRIUS
PR
FM
OUT
RE
GND AM
IN
Audio (Coaxial) output
OUT
75
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
Y
PB
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
75
PB
PR
PR
PB
IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Audio output
RE
GND AM
PR
ANTENNA
L
MONITOR OUT
TRIGG
C
COAXIAL
Y
Y
C
TRIGG
L
R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 1
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROU
MULT
R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(CD)
OPTICAL
AV 5
FRONT
AV
OUT
( TV )
AV 4
AV 6
SURROU
MULT
CD player
CD player
We recommend connecting audio devices with a coaxial digital output to the AV3 coaxial digital
jack on this unit. This connection allows you to switch to the AV input 3 just by pressing the “CD”
SCENE key (☞p. 44).
Using optical digital output sources
Select the AV input (AV1 or AV4) to which the playback device is connected for playback.
DOCK
NETWORK
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
1
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
SELECTABLE
ARC
SIRIUS
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
RE
GND AM
PR
PR
IN
OUT
75
PB
Audio (Optical) output
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
Y
MONITOR OUT
OPTICAL
TRIGG
O
O
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 2
AV 3
OPTICAL
(CD)
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROU
MULT
CD player
En
28
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
Connecting game consoles
Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as a game console to
the receiver.
Select the V-AUX input to use these connected devices.
This unit has 8 sets of input jacks (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SUR. BACK L/R and
SUBWOOFER) to input multi-channel analog sound signals. If your playback component, such as a
DVD player or SACD player, has multi-channel analog output capability, you can enjoy up to 7.1channel multi-channel sound. To output multi-channel sound, connect the audio output jacks of your
playback component to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit, and set the input source of this unit to
“MULTI CH.”
■ When connecting an HDMI compatible device
Connect the HDMI output of the device to the HDMI IN jack of this unit.
CENTER
RADIO
VIDEO AUX
STRAIGHT
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
HDMI IN
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
HDMI
HDMI output
HDMI
HDMI
Center out
Subwoofer out
Surround out
Connect the video and audio outputs of the device to the VIDEO and AUDIO jacks of this unit.
Front out
■ When connecting an non-HDMI compatible device
Surround back out
Game console
RADIO
VIDEO AUX
STRAIGHT
Multi-format player/External decoder
(7.1-channel output)
HDMI IN
VIDEO
L
V
L
AUDIO
R
R
Video output
VIDEO
V
AUDIO
L
Analog audio output
R
Game console
• When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital sound field processor and tone control are
automatically disabled.
• Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for
missing speakers, connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system when using this feature.
• When the input source is switched to “MULTI CH,” images input from a component connected to the
HDMI1-5, AV1-6, or VIDEO AUX jacks can be displayed on a video monitor (☞p. 89). If your DVD
player does not support multi-channel digital output, connect it to these input jacks.
• Be sure to turn down the volume when connecting this unit and the other devices.
• When both the HDMI connection and the analog video/audio connection are performed between the
HDMI compatible device and this unit, only the HDMI signal will be input.
En
29
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
Connecting an external amplifier
Connecting a SCENE link playback-compatible device
The same channel signals are output from the jacks of the PRE OUT terminals as from their
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main
amplifier) to enhance speaker output, connect the input terminals of the power amplifier to the PRE
OUT terminals of this unit.
When the components are the Yamaha products and have the capability of the transmission of the
remote control signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks to the remote control input
and output jack with the monaural analog mini cable as follows.
NOTE
Remote control out
When a component is connected to the PRE OUT terminals, do not connect speakers to the
SPEAKERS terminals corresponding to those PRE OUT terminals.
NETWORK
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
SELECTABLE
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Infrared signal receiver or
Yamaha component
GND AM
PR
IN
OUT
75
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
+12V
MONITOR OUT
0.1A MAX.
TRIGGER OUT
CENTER
SINGLE
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 2
AV 3
(CD)
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
PRE OUT
Remote control in
CENTER
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
Yamaha component
(CD or DVD player, etc.)
1 SUBWOOFER 2
abc d
e
a FRONT (PRE OUT) jacks
Front channel output jacks.
• When a Yamaha component that supports the SCENE link playback function is connected via the
REMOTE OUT jack, playback begins automatically when the SCENE function is used (☞p. 44).
• If the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is not a Yamaha product, set “SCENE IR” in the
SCENE menu to “Off” (☞p. 91).
b SURROUND (PRE OUT) jacks
Surround channel output jacks.
c SUR. BACK (PRE OUT) jacks
Surround back output jacks. When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel,
connect it to the SUR. BACK (SINGLE) jack.
d SUBWOOFER (PRE OUT) 1/2 jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. When two subwoofers are connected, the same sound is
output from them.
e CENTER (PRE OUT) jack
Center channel output jack.
En
30
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
Using the Trigger function to link external component power
Connecting audio/video recording devices
When this unit is connected to a Yamaha subwoofer that supports the system connection or the
component with TRIGGER IN jack, you can turn on and off the component by using this unit.
This receiver can transmit selected incoming analog audio/video signals to external components
through the AV OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks. You can record these input audio and video signals to
VCRs or similar devices, or send them to other TVs or external components.
■ When connecting a Yamaha subwoofer
Video / Audio
input
VIDEO
V
NETWORK
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
(BD/DVD)
System connection input
AUDIO
2
ARC
SELECTABLE
ARC
L
DOCK
ANTENNA
FM
NETWORK
1
REMOTE
PR
SELECTABLE
HDMI 3
R
ARC
SIRIUS
PB
ANTENNA
FM
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
PR
Y
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
HDMI 2
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
IN
OUT
75
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
GND AM
IN
+12V
0.1A MAX.
MONITOR OUT
OUT
CENTER
75
PB
PB
V
Y
Y
+12V
MONITOR OUT
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
OPTICAL
AV
OUT
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
FRONT
AUDIO 1
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
SUBWOOFER
0.1A MAX.
TRIGGER OUT
Audio input
CENTER
AUDIO
OUT
MULTI CH INPUT
AUDIO 2
VCR
VIDEO
VIDEO
Yamaha subwoofer
that supports the system
connection
L
L
R
R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(CD)
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
AUDIO
L
R
■ When connecting a component with the TRIGGER IN jack
Audio recorder
NETWORK
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
(BD/DVD)
Trigger input
2
ARC
SELECTABLE
ARC
TRIGGER IN
ANTENNA
FM
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Connect this jacks to the external component’s video input jack and analog audio input jacks.
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
Using the AUDIO OUT jacks
IN
OUT
75
Using the AV OUT jacks
Connect this jack to the external component’s analog audio input jacks.
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
+12V
MONITOR OUT
0.1A MAX.
CENTER
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
Component with the
TRIGGER IN jack
(Power amplifier or
DVD player, etc.)
HDMI audio/video signals, component video signals, and digital audio signals cannot be transmitted
from these jacks.
Functions of the TRIGGER OUT jack can be specified (☞p. 111).
En
31
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
Connecting to the network
To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable)
into the NETWORK port of this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router
that supports the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server function. To enjoy Internet
Radio or music files saved on PC and DLNA server such as NAS (Network Attached Storage), each
device must be connected properly in the network.
• Use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable (commercially available) to connect a network hub or router
and this unit.
• If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings
manually (☞p. 108).
NAS
(Network Attached Storage)
Internet
WAN
PC
LAN
Modem
Router
Network cable
DOCK
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
1
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
SELECTABLE
ARC
SIRIUS
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
RE
GND AM
PR
PR
IN
OUT
75
PB
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
Y
MONITOR OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(CD)
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
TRIGG
SURROU
MULT
En
32
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the FM/AM antennas
An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are supplied with this receiver. Connect these antennas
properly to their respective jacks.
AM loop antenna
Position the AM antenna away from the receiver.
The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
You can connect either wire to the AM jack or the
GND jack.
Indoor FM antenna
DOCK
NETWORK
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
1
HDMI 2
■ Improving FM reception
We recommend using an outdoor antenna. For more information, consult the nearest authorized
dealer.
■ Improving AM reception
Connect this unit to an outdoor antenna with a 16.4 – 32.8 ft. (5 – 10 m) vinyl-coated wire. Make
sure the AM loop antenna is still connected.
Connecting the GND jack can reduce noise. Connect the jack to a store-bought ground bar or copper
plate with a vinyl-covered wire and bury this new attachment in moist ground.
The GND jack is not to be connected to the ground socket of an electrical outlet.
HDMI 3
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
SELECTABLE
ARC
SIRIUS
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
PR
IN
OUT
75
PB
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
Y
+12V
MONITOR OUT
0.1A MAX.
TRIGGER OUT
Connecting the AM loop antenna
Press and hold
Insert
Release
Assembling the AM loop antenna
En
33
CONNECTIONS
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
This unit is equipped with a Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) that adjusts the configuration, size, and volume balance of the speakers in order to provide an optimal sound field.
Using YPAO allows you to automatically configure settings, such as adjusting speaker output and acoustic parameters to suit your listening room (the room in which this unit is placed). J1
The amount of time for measurement varies from about two to
ten minutes according to settings. Be aware of the following
when using YPAO.
• The test tone is output at high volume. Refrain from using this
function at night when it may be a nuisance to others.
• Take care that the test tone does not frighten small children.
YPAO operations can be viewed on the front panel display or
TV screen.
1
Check the following before using YPAO.
2
Place the supplied YPAO microphone at ear height in
your listening position.
Face the head of the YPAO microphone upwards.
This unit
• The headphones are removed.
YPAO microphone
TV
• This unit is connected to the TV correctly.
• The power is turned on.
• The video input to which the video output from this unit has been
selected.
Subwoofer
• The power is turned on.
• Volume is set to approximately half, and the cross-over frequency (if
present) is set to maximum.
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
When positioning the microphone, we recommend that you use
equipment that allows you to adjust the height (such as a tripod)
as a microphone stand. When using a tripod, use the tripod
screws to fix the microphone in place.
MAX
Subwoofer examples
3
Switch this unit on.
Continues to the
next page
J 1 : When you have changed the number of speakers or the locations in which they
are installed, first use YPAO to adjust the speaker balance.
En
34
CONNECTIONS
MAIN
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
4
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
AUDIO
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO
MIC jack on the front panel.
AV
1
To measure at the multiple listening positions (up to 8),
press kCursor B / C to select “Yes” and press
kENTER.
TV
DOCK
PROGR
PHONES
YPAO MIC
TONE CONTROL
CATEGORY
AM
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
To measure at one listening position, press
SILENT CINEMA
PRESET
INFO
Press kCursor B / C to select the “Multi
Position” and press kENTER to set the
number of listening positions to measure.
SCEN
BD
DVD
HDMI OUT
FM
5
TUN./CH
kCursor B / C to select “No” and press kENTER.
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
YPAO
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
BD
DVD
TV
CD
VOL.
RADIO
Continues to the
next page
OPTION
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
k
“Mic On. View ON SCREEN” appears on the front
panel display, and the following display appears on the
front panel display or TV screen.
MUTE
YPAO
REC
ENTER to Start
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
INPUT
MUTE
• It takes a few minutes to accurately measure acoustics
for one position. Keep the room as quiet as possible
while acoustics are measured.
• Wait in a corner of the room, or leave it entirely, while
acoustics are measured to avoid creating an
obstruction between the speakers and the YPAO
microphone.
MLT.Position>
SCENE
ON SCREEN
This completes preparation. To achieve more accurate
results, take note of the following when measuring
acoustics.
ENT
VOL.
SW
PL
PR
C
L
R
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
“Multi Position” is set to “Yes” at initial factory
settings. It is not necessary to perform step 5 when
measuring at the multiple listening positions.
k Cursor B / C
k ENTER
En
35
CONNECTIONS
MAIN
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
2
Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
the “Measure” and press
kENTER to start measurement.
Auto measurement starts in 10 seconds.
6
HDMI
4
AUDIO
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
NET
HDMI OUT
TUNER
FM
AM
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
YPAO
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
7
Replace the optimizer microphone at your
choosing position and press kENTER to
restart the automatic measurement.
Auto measurement restarts in 10 seconds.
VOL.
Save/Exit
• To start the measurement immediately, press
kENTER again.
• To cancel the automatic setup and return to the
previous screen, press kRETURN and then
kENTER.
CATEGORY
INFO
When “Multi Position” is set to “No” in step 5
The following display appears when measurement
finishes without any problems.
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
The following illustration shows how to place the
optimizer microphone to optimize the setup of this
unit for 8 listening positions for example.
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
Display during measurement
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
YPAO
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
k
8
6
4
VOL.
Progress 0%
PL
L
SL
SBL
SW
C
PR
R
SR
SBR
Go to step 8.
21 3
7
5
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes” in step 5
The following display appears when measurement at the
first position finishes without any problems.
YPAO
>Yes
VOL.
No
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
Repeat step 7 until the measurement at all listening
positions are made.
INPUT
MUTE
Continues to the
next page
k Cursor B / C
k ENTER
k RETURN
Go to step 7.
En
36
CONNECTIONS
MAIN
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
ZONE 2
CODE SET
The following display appears again when
measurement at the last position finishes without any
problems.
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
AUDIO
8
YPAO
AV
YPAO
SIRIUS
VOL.
Save/Exit
HDMI OUT
TUNER
NET
Press kCursor B / C to select “Save/Exit”
and press kENTER.
L
SL
SW
C
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
Press kENTER.
Automatic setup is completed. Disconnect the
YPAO microphone.
VOL.
Select:Save
R
SR
10
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat. When you
have finished measuring, store the microphone out of
direct sunlight, and away from locations that may
experience high temperatures, such as on top of AV
equipment.
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
k
DISPLAY
NOTE
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
If a problem occurs, an error message or report is
displayed either during or after acoustic measurement.
Refer to “When an error message is displayed during
measurement” (☞p. 39), or “When a warning
message is displayed after measurement” (☞p. 39) to
resolve the problem and measure acoustics with
YPAO again.
9
Press kCursor D / E to select “SAVE”
and press kENTER.
YPAO
VOL.
Disconnect Mic
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
MUTE
Result
Displays the results of automatic
acoustics measurement. Refer to
“Reviewing automatic setup parameters”
for details (☞p. 38).
Save/Exit
Applies the result to the speaker setup and
finishes the automatic measurement.
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
En
37
CONNECTIONS
MAIN
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Reviewing automatic setup
SOURCE RECEIVER
parameters
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
4
The results of automatic acoustics measurement can be
reviewed once measurement is complete.
AUDIO
AV
1
2
3
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
When automatic setup parameters are reloaded,
manually configured settings are cleared. To save
manually configured settings before reloading
automatic setup parameters, see “Prohibiting setting
changes” (☞p. 112).
SIRIUS
NET
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
Select the desired menu item (or enable a
function) using kCursor B / C / D / E and
kENTER.
Wiring
NOTE
DOCK
HDMI OUT
2
Size
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
1
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
R
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
k
Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Result” and press kENTER immediately
after the automatic measurement.
The Result menu can be viewed only by performing
the automatic measurement.
REC
The results of acoustics measurement are displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
a
c
MUTE
b
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
Displays the polarity of each connected
speaker.
• “Normal” is displayed when the
polarity of the connected speaker is
normal.
Displays the size of the connected
speakers.
• “Large” is displayed when the
connected speaker has the ability to
reproduce the low-frequency signals
effectively.
• “Small” is displayed when the
connected speaker does not have the
ability to reproduce the low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance
Displays the distance from the listening
position to speakers. The unit for distance
can be switched between “ft” (feet) and
“m” (meter) by pressing kCursor D / E.
Level
Displays the result of the adjustment of
each connected speaker output level.
Setup Reload J1
Clears the fine-adjustment with Manual
Setup and reloads the result of automatic
setup. For details, refer to “Reloading
automatic setup parameters.”
3
Press kRETURN to finish “Result” menu.
The result of automatic setup can be fine-tuned
manually by “Manual Setup.” Refer to “Manual
speaker setup” (☞p. 99) for details.
■ Reloading automatic setup
parameters
If you are not satisfied with the fine-adjustment of setup
parameters with Manual Setup, the result of automatic
setup saved on this unit can be reloaded. Select “Setup
Reload” in the Result menu.
NOTE
When automatic setup parameters are reloaded,
manually configured settings are cleared. To avoid
clearing manually configured settings by reloading
automatic setup parameters, see “Prohibiting setting
changes” (☞p. 112).
a List of menu items
Menu items available in the Result menu are displayed.
b Number of measurement
c
Indicates the number of measurements for multiple
listening positions.
Diagram
Shows the speaker setup and sound adjustment as diagram.
J 1 : This item is displayed after the fine-adjustment is performed with
“Manual Setup.” Use this item to return to the settings to the result
of automatic setup.
En
38
CONNECTIONS
MAIN
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ When an error message is
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
V-AUX
AV
1
displayed during measurement
See “Error messages” (☞p. 40) for instructions on
resolving the problem and measure acoustics again.
DOCK
3
4
Press kCursor E to select “RETRY.”
Press kENTER to use YPAO again.
■ When a warning message is
displayed after measurement
See “Warning messages” (☞p. 41) for instructions on
resolving the problem. The speaker causing the problem
can be confirmed from the TV screen display.
HDMI OUT
When “E-5” or “E-9” is displayed:
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
Check the error code displayed and use YPAO to
measure acoustics again as described below.
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
R
displayed
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
k When “E-1,” “E-2,” “E-3,” “E-4” or “E-6” is
1
2
3
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
1
2
3
4
5
Press kENTER.
Press kCursor E to select “EXIT.”
Check that the environment is suitable for
accurate measurement.
Press kCursor D / E to select a option.
PROCEED:
When “E-5” is displayed, measurement can proceed.
However, the measurement in noisy environment may
reduce the accuracy.
When “E-9” is displayed, resume the aborted step.
RETRY:
Restart measurement from the beginning.
Press kENTER to execute the selected
option.
Press kENTER to terminate YPAO, and
switch the unit to standby mode.
4
Check that the speakers are properly
connected.
When “E-10” is displayed:
Turn on the unit and use YPAO again.
When “E-7” or “E-8” is displayed
1
2
Press kENTER.
Press kENTER.
Check that the environment is suitable for
accurate measurement.
1
2
3
4
Press kENTER.
Press kCursor E to select “EXIT.”
Press kENTER to terminate YPAO, and
switch the unit to standby mode.
NOTE
Although the results of acoustics measurement can be
applied when a warning message is displayed, optimal
sound will not be achieved. Resolving the problem
and using YPAO to measure acoustics again is
recommended.
To exit YPAO with some options
1
2
Use kCursor B / C to select “Save/Exit”
and press kENTER.
Use kCursor D / E to select one of the
following options and press kENTER.
SAVE:
Exits YPAO applying the results of measurement.
CANCEL:
Returns to the previous screen (warning message
screen).
EXIT:
Exits YPAO without saving the results.
Turn on the unit and use YPAO again.
En
39
CONNECTIONS
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
■ Message list
■ Error messages
NOTE
If the following messages appear, resolve the problems that have
occurred and carry out the measurement process again.
■ When a warning message is displayed before
measurement
Connect MIC!
The YPAO microphone is
not connected.
Connect the YPAO
microphone to the YPAO
MIC jack on the front
panel.
Unplug HP!
The headphones are
connected.
Remove the headphones.
Memory Guard!
The settings of this unit
are protected.
Set “Memory Guard” in
the Setup menu to “Off”
(☞p. 112).
E-1:
No Front SP
E-2:
No Sur. SP
The unit was not able to
find the front channel.
Check that the left and
right front speakers are
connected correctly.
The unit was only able to
find one of side of the
surround channels.
Check that the left and
right surround speakers
are connected correctly.
The unit was only able to
find one of side of the
presence channels.
Check that the left and
right presence speakers
are connected correctly.
E-4:
SBR→SBL
Only one surround back
speaker is connected and
only the right side
surround back channel
sound is detected.
When only one surround
back speaker is
connected, connect to the
left side (SINGLE)
terminal.
E-5:
Noisy
The noise is too loud,
preventing accurate
measurements from
being taken.
Measure again in quiet
surroundings. Turn off any
devices in the room that
may be emitting noise, or
place them further away
from the YPAO
microphone.
When this message is
displayed, selecting
“PROCEED” will allow
you to continue measuring.
However, we recommend
resolving the problem and
measuring again, as
continuing measurement
without doing so will not
give accurate results.
E-3:
No F.PRNS SP
E-6:
Check Sur.
Even though surround
left and right speakers are
not connected, only the
surround back speakers
are connected.
E-7:
No MIC
The YPAO microphone
has been removed.
While measuring, take
care not to touch the
YPAO microphone.
E-8:
No Signal
The YPAO microphone
could not distinguish a
test tone.
Check that the YPAO
microphone has been
installed correctly.
Check that each speaker
has been connected and
installed correctly.
The YPAO microphone
or the YPAO MIC jack
may be broken. Inquire at
the retailer where you
purchased this unit, or the
nearest Yamaha service
center.
E-9:
User Cancel
You have carried out an
operation that has
cancelled the measuring
process.
Carry out the measuring
process again. Do not
operate this unit by, for
example, adjusting the
volume.
E-10:
Internal Error
An internal error has
occurred.
Carry out the measuring
process again. Contact a
Yamaha service center if
“E-10” is displayed
again.
When using surround back
speakers, connection of the
surround left/right
speakers is necessary.
En
40
CONNECTIONS
Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
■ Warning messages
W-1:
Out of Phase
The speakers displayed
are connected with the
opposite polarity.
Depending on the type of
speakers you are using
and the environment in
which you have them
installed, this message
may occur even if the
speakers are connected
correctly.
Depending on the type of
speakers, “W-1” may
display even if the
speakers are connected
correctly.
W-2:
Over 24m/80ft
The speakers displayed
are separated from the
listening position by
more than 24 m, and
cannot be adjusted
correctly.
Install the speakers with
24 m of the listening
position.
W-3:
Level Error
Volume level varies
greatly for individual
channels, and cannot be
adjusted correctly.
Check that all speakers
are installed in the same
surroundings.
Check that the speaker
polarity + (positive), and
- (negative) are correct. If
these are connected
correctly, you can use the
speakers normally even
this message appears.
Check that the speaker
polarity + (positive), and
- (negative) are correct.
We recommend the same
speakers or speakers with
as similar specifications
as possible.
Adjust the volume of the
subwoofer.
If “W-2” or “W-3” appears, you can apply measurement results,
but they will not give optimal results. We recommend that you
resolve the problem and carry out the measurement process
again.
En
41
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Basic playback procedure
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
AV
d
DOCK
HDMI OUT
r
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
1
2
Turn on external components (TV, DVD
player, etc.) connected to this unit.
Use the dInput selector to select the input
source.
The name of the selected input source is displayed for
a few seconds. J1
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
When DOCK, TUNER, SIRIUS, or NET is selected,
the Content window is displayed (☞p. 56).
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
ENTER
RETURN
VOLUME
u
MUTE
v
3
To mute the output.
Press vMUTE to mute the audio output.
Press vMUTE again to unmute.
■ Selecting the active HDMI OUT jack
Use this function to select the HDMI OUT jack(s) used
to output signal.
Press rHDMI OUT repeatedly to select setting.
The HDMI output setting changes as follows.
HDMI OUT 1+2
HDMI OUT 1
HDMI OUT Off
HDMI OUT 2
HDMI OUT 1+2
Outputs the signal at both the HDMI
OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks
simultaneously.
HDMI OUT 1
Refer to the instruction manuals provided with the
external component for details on playback.
Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 1
jack.
HDMI OUT 2
Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 2
jack.
For details on the following operations, refer to the
corresponding pages:
HDMI OUT Off
Any signals are not output at the HDMI
OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. Select
this setting when you do not use the video
monitor connected to one of the HDMI
OUT jacks.
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
4
Press uVOLUME +/- to adjust the volume.
Play the external component that you have
selected as the source input, or select a
radio station on the tuner.
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
INPUT
MUTE
d Input selector
r HDMI OUT
u VOLUME +/v MUTE
ENT
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
“FM/AM tuning” (☞p. 57)
“Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio™” (☞p. 61)
“Playing back tunes on the PC” (☞p. 67)
“Listening to the Internet Radio” (☞p. 69)
“Using the Rhapsody® service” (☞p. 71)
“Listening to the SIRIUS Internet Radio” (☞p. 75)
“Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™”
(☞p. 79)
• “Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components”
(☞p. 83)
• The HDMI OUT jack that utilizes the HDMI Control
function can be selected with “Control Select”
(☞p. 106).
• The active HDMI OUT jack(s) can be registered with
the SCENE function (☞p. 44).
J 1 : You can change the input source name displayed on the front
panel display as necessary (☞p. 88).
En
42
PLAYBACK
Basic playback procedure
■ Adjusting high/low-frequency sound
(Tone control)
You can adjust the balance of the high-frequency range (Treble)
and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds output from the front
left and right speakers to obtain desired tone.
The tone control of the speakers or headphones can be set
separately. Set the headphone tone control with the headphones
connected.
1
Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly
to select “Treble” or “Bass.”
TONE CONTROL
2
Rotate PROGRAM selector to adjust the output level
in those frequency ranges.
Adjustable range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB
The display returns to the previous display soon after you release
the key.
• The tone control settings are not effective when this unit is in the
Pure Direct mode or “MULTI CH” is selected as an input source.
• If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those
from other channels well.
• The tone control can also be adjusted in the Option menu
(☞p. 54).
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2
ZONE CONTROL
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INPUT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
PROGRAM
PHONES
YPAO MIC
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SILENT CINEMA
H
PROGRAM selector
The current setting is displayed on the front panel display.
TONE
Treble
VOL.
+0.5dB
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
En
43
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function)
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
This unit has a SCENE function that allows you switch this unit on and change input sources, sound programs, and HDMI OUT with one key.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
V-AUX
AV
1
DOCK
HDMI OUT
Four scenes are available for different uses, such as
d playing movies or music. The following input sources,
sound programs, and HDMI OUT are provided as the
initial factory settings.
r
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
SCENE
Input
Sound
program
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
s
i
Drama
Compressed
Music
Enhancer
Off
BD/
DVD
HDMI1
TV
AV4
STRAIGHT
On
HDMI
OUT 1+2
CD
AV3
STRAIGHT
Off
HDMI
OUT 1+2
RADIO
TUNER
STRAIGHT
On
HDMI
OUT 1+2
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT 1+2
Registering input sources/sound
program/HDMI OUT
1
2
Use dInput selector to select the input
source you want to register.
Use the sSound selection keys or
rHDMI OUT to select the sound program,
Compressed Music Enhancer, or HDMI OUT
you want to register.
3
Press the iSCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front panel
display.
SCENE1
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
SET Complete
Release the key when “SET Complete” is displayed
• When changing “SCENE,” also change the external
component that the remote control operates (☞p. 115).
• Selecting a scene and editing the scene function are
also available in the SCENE menu (☞p. 90).
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
Enjoying favorite sound field effect
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
d Input selector
i SCENE
r HDMI OUT
s Sound selection keys
This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. Multi-channel playback from almost any audio source can be enjoyed using a variety
of sound decoders and various sound field effect programs stored on the chip. Sound field effect programs built into this unit are called “sound programs.”
Selecting sound programs and
sound decoders
This unit offers sound programs in many different
categories suitable for movies, music and other uses.
Choose a sound program that sounds best with the
source you are playing back, rather than relying on the
name or explanation of the program.
• Sound programs are stored for each input source.
When you change the input source, the sound program
previously selected for that input source is applied
again.
• When you playback DTS Express sources or audio
signals with sampling frequency of higher than
96 kHz, the straight decoding mode (☞p. 45) is
automatically selected.
• When you playback DTS-HD sources with CINEMA
DSP, the DTS decoder is automatically selected.
Continues to the
next page
En
44
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Enjoying favorite sound field effect
ZONE 2
CODE SET
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
NET
HDMI OUT
CATEGORY
FM
■ Enjoying stereo playback
Press sMUSIC repeatedly
Use straight decoding mode when you want to playback
sound without sound field processing. You can playback
as follows in straight decoding mode.
Selecting surround decoder:
2-channel sources such as CD
Select “2ch Stereo” from the sound programs when you
want to playback 2-channel stereo sound (from the front
speakers only), regardless of the playback source.
Selecting “2ch Stereo” will playback as follows for the
playback of CD and BD/DVD sources.
Press sSUR. DECODE repeatedly
Stereo sound plays through the front left and right
speakers.
2-channel sources such as CD
Multi-channel playback sources such as BD/
DVD
Multi-channel sources such as BD/DVD
MOVIE category: Press sMOVIE repeatedly
MUSIC category: Press sMUSIC repeatedly
(Straight decoding mode)
Selecting stereo reproduction:
AV
TUNER
■ Enjoying unprocessed playback
Selecting sound program (☞p. 48):
SOURCE RECEIVER
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
BD
DVD
TV
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
CD
s Turning on Pure Direct mode (☞p. 47):
Press sPURE DIRECT
Turning on Compressed Music Enhancer
(☞p. 47):
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
Press sSTRAIGHT
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
Turning on Straight decoding mode:
Stereo sound plays back through the front speakers.
Plays back audio from a playback source without
applying sound field effects, using an appropriate
decoder to split the signal into multiple channels.
Press sMUSIC repeatedly to select “2ch
Stereo.”
Press sSTRAIGHT to enable the straight
decoding mode.
Press sENHANCER repeatedly
DISPLAY
MUSIC
Sound program categories
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
VOL.
MOVIE
REC
VOL.
Sci-Fi
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Program
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
• You can use the speaker indicators on the front panel
display to check what speakers are currently
outputting sound (☞p. 10).
• You can adjust sound field elements (sound field
parameters) for each of the programs (☞p. 93).
Straight
L
SL
SBL
SW
C
Sci-Fi
VOL.
SW
2ch Stereo
L
R
R
SR
SBR
To disable stereo playback, press any of the
sSound selection keys to select a sound program
other than “2ch Stereo.”
To disable straight decoding mode, press
sSTRAIGHT again.
MOVIE
Playback channels other than the front channels in the
playback source are mixed with the front channels and
played back through the front speakers.
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Previously selected program
s Sound selection keys
s MOVIE
s MUSIC
s ENHANCER
s SUR. DECODE
s STRAIGHT
s PURE DIRECT
En
45
PLAYBACK
Enjoying favorite sound field effect
■ Enjoying sound programs without
■ Enjoying more spatial sound fields
■ Enjoying sound programs without
This unit allows you to use virtual surround speakers to enjoy
sound field surround effects, even without any surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP mode). You can even enjoy surround sound
presence with just a minimal configuration of the front speakers
only.
This unit will switch to Virtual CINEMA DSP mode automatically
when surround speakers are unavailable. J1
CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates an intensive and accurate
stereoscopic sound field in the listening room.
Connection of presence speakers is recommended to take full
advantage of the effects of CINEMA DSP 3D mode. Do the
following steps. J3
This unit allows you to use virtual presence speakers to create an
intensive and accurate stereoscopic sound field, even when no
presence speakers are connected (Virtual CINEMA DSP 3D
mode). You can even enjoy surround sound presence with front
speakers, center speaker, and surround speakers.
This unit automatically switches to Virtual CINEMA DSP 3D
mode when presence speakers are not available.
Do the following steps.
surround speakers
■ Enjoying sound programs with
headphones
Even when headphones are connected, you can enjoy the
reproduction sound field presence with ease (SILENT CINEMA
mode). J2
(CINEMA DSP 3D mode)
• Connect the presence speakers to the EXTRA SP jacks and set the
speakers to use (☞p. 15).
• Enable CINEMA DSP 3D Mode in the Option menu (☞p. 53).
When a sound program runs in CINEMA DSP 3D mode, the
CINEMA DSP 3D indicator on the front panel lights up.
Lights up
MUSIC
presence speakers
• Connect the front speakers, center speaker, and surround speakers.
• Enable center speaker and surround speakers in “Configuration”
(☞p. 100).
• Enable CINEMA DSP 3D Mode in the Option menu (☞p. 53).
VOL.
3
Hall in Vienna
SW
PL
PR
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
J 1 : However, Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is not available under the following
J 2 : However, SILENT CINEMA mode is not available under the following
conditions:
• When headphones are connected to this unit.
• When a “7ch Stereo” or “2ch Stereo” sound program is selected.
• When Pure Direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected.
conditions:
• When a “2ch Stereo” sound program is selected.
• When Pure Direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected.
J 3 : However, CINEMA DSP 3D mode is not available under the following
conditions:
• When headphones are connected to this unit.
• When a “7ch Stereo” or “2ch Stereo” sound program is selected.
• When Pure Direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected.
En
46
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Enjoying favorite sound field effect
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Enjoying Hi-Fi Sound Quality
SOURCE RECEIVER
(Pure Direct mode)
HDMI
1
2
3
4
Use Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity
sound of the selected source. When Pure Direct mode is
enabled, this unit plays back the selected source with the
least circuitry. J1
AUDIO
5
1
V-AUX
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
NET
HDMI OUT
TUNER
Press sPURE DIRECT to turn Pure Direct mode
on. J2
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
BD
DVD
TV
TUN./CH
To disable Pure Direct mode, press
sPURE DIRECT again.
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
INPUT
s
■ Enjoying compressed music
source with better sound quality
(Compressed Music Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer mode improves the sound
enhancer near to the original depth and width of
compression artifacts. J3
This mode can be used along with any other DSP modes.
Press sENHANCER to turn Compressed Music
Enhancer on.
ENT
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer
is active
MUTE
ENHANCER
Enhancer On
s ENHANCER
s PURE DIRECT
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
To disable Compressed Music Enhancer, press
sENHANCER again.
J 1 : The following features are disabled in Pure Direct mode.
• sound program, tone control, YPAO PEQ, and Adaptive DRC
• displaying and operating the Option menu and Setup menu
J 2 : While Pure Direct mode is on, the front panel display screen turns
off in order to reduce noise. When turning Pure Direct mode off,
the screen returns on.
J 3 : However, Compressed Music Enhancer is not available in the
following audio:
• Signals of which sampling rate is over 48kHz
• High Definition stream
En
47
PLAYBACK
Enjoying favorite sound field effect
Sound programs
Action Game
This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing, fighting games and FPS
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are
right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration.
Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and
strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth
to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects
and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes.
Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more clear and
spatial sound field.
Music Video
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz
music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field
that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments,
and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
in the table indicates the sound program for CINEMA DSP.
■ Category: MOVIE
Sound programs optimized for viewing video sources such as movies, TV programs, and games.
Standard
This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surround feeling without disturbing the
original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has
been designed with the concept of an ideal movie theater, in which the audience is
surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.
Spectacle
This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It
reproduces a broad theater sound field that matches cinemascope and wider-screen movies
with an excellent dynamic range providing everything from very small sound effects to
large, impressive sounds.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science
fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically
created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and
background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure
movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also
restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the
sound.
Drama
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from
serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an
optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically
around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even
after long hours of viewing.
Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in
an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion
and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound
depth.
Sports
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety
programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and
sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands
in an optimal space to offer the listeners a feeling of presence in the stadium.
En
48
PLAYBACK
Enjoying favorite sound field effect
■ Category: MUSIC
■ Category: SUR.DEC (Surround decode mode)
This sound field is suitable when listening to music sources such as CDs.
Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel audio
sources in up to 7-channels using a surround decoder.
Hall in Munich
Hall in Vienna
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using
stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine,
beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual
seat is at the center left of the arena.
This is an approximately 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is
traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from
all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a
palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber
music.
Cellar Club
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic,
live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460
seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
The Bottom Line
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once.
The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant
sound.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2-channels. When multi-channel
signals are input, they are down mixed to 2-channels and output from the front left and right
speakers.
7ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you playback multi-channel
sources, this unit down-mixes the source to 2-channels, and then outputs the sound from all
speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at
parties, etc.
q Pro Logic
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of audio
sources.
q PLIIx Movie /
q PLII Movie
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is
suitable for movies. J1
q PLIIx Music /
q PLII Music
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is
suitable for music. J1
q PLIIx Game /
q PLII Game
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is
suitable for games. J1
Neo:6 Cinema
Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for movies.
Neo:6 Music
Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for music.
J 1 : You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder in the following conditions:
• When “Surround Back” is set to “None” (☞p. 100).
• When headphones are connected.
En
49
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
Using the TV display to control this unit
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
This unit features a sophisticated on-screen display (OSD) that helps you to control the amplifier function of this unit. With the OSD, you can view information of the
signals being input and the status of this unit. Visual guidance simplifies operations for menus.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
V-AUX
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
Basic operations via the TV screen
display
HDMI OUT
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
1
Use kCursor B / C to select “Input” and
press kENTER.
TUN./CH
A TV screen is required to display the ON SCREEN
or Option menu. Refer to “Connecting a TV monitor”
for instructions on connecting a TV screen (☞p. 22).
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
■ Selecting an input source
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
• Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu
screen. Press kRETURN repeatedly to close the ON
SCREEN menu.
• In addition to selecting an input source, detailed
settings for each input source can be configured. Refer
to “Configuring input sources (Input menu)” (☞p. 86)
for details.
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
j
This section describes basic operations for configuring
“Input,” “Scene” and “Sound Program” using the OSD.
k Press jON SCREEN.
The ON SCREEN menu is displayed on the TV screen.
Input source icons are displayed at the bottom of the
TV screen.
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
2
Use kCursor D / E to select a Input source
press kENTER.
The input source is selected.
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
En
50
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Using the TV display to control this unit
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Selecting a scene
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Selecting a sound program
HDMI
1
2
3
4
1
AUDIO
5
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
V-AUX
AV
1
Use kCursor B / C to select “Scene” and
press kENTER.
1
Use kCursor B / C to select “Sound
Program” and press kENTER.
DOCK
HDMI OUT
NOTES
Menus can be operated and the status of this unit
confirmed from the following three main displays.
• ON SCREEN menu (☞p. 86)
• Option menu (☞p. 52)
• Content window (☞p. 56)
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
These menus and status features can be used to
configure more various functions in addition to
selecting “Input,” “Scene” and “Sound Program.”
Refer to each references for details on menus and
status.
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
Scene icons are displayed at the bottom of the TV
screen.
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
Sound program icons are displayed at the bottom of the
TV screen.
k
2
Use kCursor D / E to select a scene and
press kENTER.
The scene is selected.
2
Use kCursor D / E to select a sound
program and press kENTER.
The sound program is selected.
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
• Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu
screen. Press kRETURN repeatedly to close the ON
SCREEN menu.
• Refer to “Changing input settings with a single key
(SCENE function)” (☞p. 44) for details on the default
scene settings.
• Detailed SCENE function settings can be edited. Refer
to “Editing the SCENE function (SCENE menu)”
(☞p. 90) for details.
• Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu
screen. Press kRETURN repeatedly to close the ON
SCREEN menu.
• Refer to “Enjoying favorite sound field effect” (☞p. 44)
for various sound programs.
• You can configure the detailed settings for each sound
program. Refer to “Setting sound program parameters
(Sound Program menu)” (☞p. 93) for details.
En
51
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (Option menu)
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
This unit has a unique Option menu for each input source. Option menus can be used to enable features such as volume trim for compatible input sources or to display
audio/video data.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
d
Option menu display and setup
HDMI OUT
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
Option menu operations are displayed on the front panel
display or TV screen. TV display is used here to explain
operation.
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
t
k
1
2
Use dInput selector to select an input
source to which options will be applied.
Press tOPTION.
The Option menu is displayed.
3
Use kCursor B / C to select the desired
setting and press kENTER.
5
Press tOPTION to close the Option menu.
Parameters of the selected item are displayed.
4
Use kCursor B / C / D / E to select the
desired item (or enable a function).
The keys on the remote control may not respond for a
few seconds after the Option menu is closed. Should
this occur, select the input source again.
• Press kRETURN to display the previous screen or
close the Option menu.
• The Option menu may close automatically when some
functions are enabled.
DISPLAY
Option menu
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
d Input selector
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
t OPTION
The displayed Option menu settings differ depending
on the input source.
For more information, refer to the “Option menu” on
the next page.
En
52
PLAYBACK
Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (Option menu)
Option menu
The following items are provided for each input source. “✓” indicates the available menu for each input source. J1
PC
NET
RADIO
Rhapsody
SIRIUS IR
DOCK
(iPod)
DOCK
(Bluetooth)
TUNER
SIRIUS
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
HDMI 1-5
AV1-4
AV5-6
AUDIO1-2
V-AUX
Tone Control
✓
✓
✓
✓
Adaptive DRC
✓
✓
✓
CINEMA DSP
3D Mode
✓
✓
Dialogue
Lift J2
✓
✓
Extended
Surround
✓
✓
Volume Trim
✓
✓
MULTI CH
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Shuffle
✓
✓
✓ J3
Repeat
✓
✓
✓ J3
Connect
✓
Disconnect
✓
Pairing
✓
J 1 : When “Tone Control,” “Adaptive DRC,” “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode,”
“Dialogue Lift,” or “Extended Surround” is adjusted for an input source, the
same value is applied to other input sources and “ALL” is displayed on the
front panel display. When settings specific to a certain input source are
selected, the input source name is displayed on the front panel display. If the
name of the input source has been changed (☞p. 88), the original name of the
input source is displayed.
J 2 : “Dialogue Lift” can be adjusted only when the presence speakers are available.
J 3 : Not available for Yamaha Wireless System for iPod.
En
53
PLAYBACK
Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (Option menu)
■ Adjusting high/low-frequency sound
■ Auto-adjusting the sound level to make
even low volumes more audible
Tone Control
■ Adjusts the vertical position of dialogues
Dialogue Lift
Adjustable range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB
On
Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.
Off (Default)
Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically.
Adjusts the vertical position of center sound such as dialogues
when presence speakers are used. Increasing this parameter raises
the position.
The ideal dialog
position
When “On” is selected, the dynamic range is adjusted as follows.
If the volume level is low, the dynamic range is narrow.
If the volume level is high, the dynamic range is wide.
Output Level
• The tone control of the speakers or headphones can be set
separately. Set the headphone tone control with the headphones
connected.
• TONE CONTROL on the front panel can also be used (☞p. 43).
Adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level
(from minimum to maximum). When you play audio at night or at
low volumes, it is a good idea to set parameter to “On.” J1
Output Level
You can adjust the balance of the high-frequency range (Treble)
and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds output from the front
left and right speakers to obtain desired tone.
Adaptive DRC
On
Off
Input Level
Volume: low
If the dialog seems to come out from a lower position than the
video monitor screen, increase this parameter.
On
Off
Input Level
Move up to the ideal
dialog position
Volume: high
■ Enjoying more spatial sound fields
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Set whether to use sound programs in CINEMA DSP 3D mode
(☞p. 46).
On (Default)
Enables CINEMA DSP 3D mode.
Off
Disables CINEMA DSP 3D mode.
“0” (default) corresponds to the lowest position and “5” to the
highest position.
• “Dialogue Lift” can be adjusted only when the presence speakers
are available.
• You cannot move the dialog position lower than the default
setting.
J 1 : “Adaptive DRC” is also effective when you use headphones.
En
54
PLAYBACK
Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (Option menu)
■ Selecting the 5.1-channel signal playback
method
■ Adjusting volume between input sources
Volume Trim
Extended Surround
Selects whether to reproduce 5.1-channel input signals in 6.1- or
7.1-channel when surround back speakers are used. J1
Auto (Default)
q PLIIx Movie
q PLIIx Music
EX/ES
Off
Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if a
flag for reproducing surround back channel is present,
and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.
Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder whether or not
surround back channel signals are contained. You can
select this parameter when two surround back
speakers are connected.
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel
using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder whether
or not surround back channel signals are contained.
You can select this parameter when one or two
surround back speakers are connected.
Automatically selects the most suitable decoder for
input signals whether or not the flag for reproducing
surround back channel is present, and always
reproduces signals in 6.1-channel.
Always reproduces original channels whether or not
the flag for reproducing surround back channel is
present.
Repeat
Reduces any change in volume when switching between input
sources by correcting volume differences in each input source. You
can adjust this parameter for each input source.
Adjustable range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Default setting
0.0 dB
Adjustment
increments
■ Repeat playback
0.5 dB steps
■ Shuffle playback
Shuffle
Plays songs or albums repeatedly. When the repeat function is
enabled, “
(Single / One[iPod])” or “
(All)” appears on
the TV screen. J2
Off
The repeat function is turned off.
Single / One[iPod]
Plays a song back repeatedly.
All
When all songs have completed playback, returns to
the start and repeats playback.
■ Connect / Disconnect Bluetooth
component
Connect
Plays back songs or albums in random order. When the shuffle
function is enabled, “
” appears on the TV screen. J2
Off
The shuffle function is turned off.
On J3
The shuffle function is tuned on.
Songs J4
Plays songs back in random order.
Albums J4
Plays albums back in random order.
Disconnect
Switches communication with a Bluetooth component on and off
(☞p. 83).
■ Pairing Bluetooth component
Pairing
Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component (☞p. 83).
J 1 : AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when “Audio Return Channel” is on,
and the input source is used for “TV Audio Input.”
J 2 : Not available for Yamaha Wireless System for iPod.
J 3 : This item is displayed only when PC or Rhapsody is selected as input source.
J 4 : This item is displayed only when DOCK (iPod) is selected as input source.
En
55
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
Confirming and operating input sources from the Content window
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
When NET, DOCK, TUNER, or SIRIUS is selected, the Content window is displayed on the TV screen. Playback style for iPod, functions for FM/AM tuner, SIRIUS
Satellite Radio tuner, Rhapsody, SIRIUS Internet Radio, Internet Radio, and PC can be set in the Content window.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
NET
HDMI OUT
TUNER
d
A TV screen is required to display the Content
window. Refer to “Connecting a TV monitor” for
instructions on connecting a TV monitor (☞p. 22).
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
Displaying the Content window on
the TV screen
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
Buttons to operate each input source are displayed here.
These buttons vary depending on the selected input. For
details on operations for each input, see the following.
– FM/AM tuner (☞p. 59)
– SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner (☞p. 61)
– PC servers (☞p. 68)
– Internet Radio (☞p. 74)
– Rhapsody (☞p. 71)
– iPod (☞p. 80)
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
c Screen button area
MUTE
Press dNET, dDOCK, dTUNER or dSIRIUS to
display the Content window.
k The Content window consists of two main displays, the
Now Playing view and the Browse view.
l
Below is the example of the Now Playing view for TUNER.
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
Switching the display between the
Now Playing view and the Browse
view
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
d DOCK
d TUNER
d SIRIUS
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
l DISPLAY
• In the Now Playing view, press kENTER and use
kCursor B / C to select the button. Then press
kENTER to execute the selection.
• In the Browse view, press kCursor E and use k
Cursor B / C to select the button. Then press k
ENTER to execute the selection.
• Press kRETURN repeatedly to exit from the
operation.
a
b
c
a Image display
Icon for each input source or album art is displayed.
b Information display
Information on the current input source is displayed.
You can switch the display between the Now Playing
view and the Browse view by the following methods.
• Press lDISPLAY to cycle between the Now Playing
Browse view
or
lDISPLAY
or
lDISPLAY
Now Playing view
When selecting “DOCK (iPod)” as input source and
playing back video content of iPod/iPhone, the screen
switches as follows by pressing lDISPLAY
repeatedly.
Now Playing view → Browse view →
Video playback screen (content window disappears)
→ Now Playing view
view and the Browse view.
• In the Now Playing view, press kENTER and use
kCursor B / C to select the
icon. Then press
kENTER to switch to the Browse view.
• In the Browse view, press kCursor E and use k
Cursor B / C to select the
icon. Then press
kENTER to switch to the Now Playing view.
En
56
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
FM/AM tuning
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
When using the FM/AM tuner, adjust the direction of
the FM/AM antenna connected to this unit to get the
best reception.
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
NET
AV
HDMI OUT
TUNER
d
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
e
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
1
2
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
Selecting a frequency for reception
(Normal tuning)
Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input.
Press eFM or eAM to select a band to
receive.
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
3
Use eTUN./CH H / I to set a frequency to
receive.
eTUN./CH H
Increases the frequency. Press and hold this key for
longer than a second to search automatically for a station
on a higher frequency than the current one. J1
eTUN./CH I
Decreases the frequency. Press and hold this key for
longer than a second to search automatically for a station
on a lower frequency than the current one. J1
Lights up when a broadcast
is received from a station
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
FM87.5 MHz
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
Lights up when a stereo
broadcast is received
L
SL
SBL
SW
C
VOL.
R
SR
SBR
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
FM98.5 MHz
■ Entering a frequency number
m
In normal tuning mode, use the mNumeric keys to
enter a frequency. Leave the decimal point out when
entering a number. J2
For example, enter as follows to select a station on
98.5 MHz.
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
9
d TUNER
e FM
e AM
e MEMORY
e TUN./CH H / I
m Numeric keys
8
■ Registering stations manually (Manual
Preset)
Select stations manually and register them as presets
individually.
1
Tune in to the station you want to
register, referring to “Selecting a
frequency for reception (Normal tuning).”
2
Use one of the following methods to
register the station you are currently
receiving.
■ Registering to a preset number to which
no station is registered
Press eMEMORY for 3 seconds or longer.
The station will be registered automatically to the
lowest open preset number (or the next number after
the one registered most recently).
MEMORY
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
01:FM98.5 MHz
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Registered frequencies
5
J 1 : When searching for a station, release the key once the search has
started.
J 2 : “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you
enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that
the frequency entered is correct.
En
57
PLAYBACK
MAIN
FM/AM tuning
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
■ Designating a preset number for
registration
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
4
AUDIO
Press eMEMORY once, to display “Manual Preset”
on the front panel display. After a small wait, the
preset number that the station has been registered to
will appear.
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
NET
HDMI OUT
TUNER
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
e
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
TV
CD
The newly registered frequency
985
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
01:Empty
SCENE
BD
DVD
Preset number
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
Blinks
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
Press ePRESET F / G to select the preset number
to register the station to, and then press eMEMORY
to register.
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
Empty, or the frequency
registered most previously
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
m
5
6
7
9
0
10
8
To select a registered station, press
ePRESET F / G to select the preset number
of the station. J1
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
e MEMORY
e PRESET F / G
m Numeric keys
J 1 : To select a station by selecting a preset number, use the
mNumeric keys to enter the preset number of the station you
want to listen. When an invalid number is entered, “Wrong Num.”
appears on the front panel display. Check that you have entered
the correct number.
En
58
PLAYBACK
MAIN
FM/AM tuning
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Navigating the FM/AM tuner from
the Content window
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
AUDIO
AV
1
DOCK
HDMI OUT
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
BD
DVD
TV
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
■ Operating from the Now Playing
RADIO
view
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
c
e
d
g
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
f
a Tuned indicator
b
d TUNER
k Cursor B / C
k ENTER
You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by
specifying its frequency.
FM
Switches a band to FM.
AM
Switches a band to AM.
Tuning -
Decreases the frequency.
Tuning +
Increases the frequency.
Auto -
Automatically searches for a station on a
lower frequency than the current station.
Auto +
Automatically searches for a station on a
higher frequency than the current station.
Direct
Selects the frequency manually.
Memory
Registers the station currently received as
a preset station. Up to 40 FM/AM stations
can be registered.
Selects “Stereo” or “Mono” when
receiving the FM station.
Browse
Switches the display to the Browse view.
Continues to the
next page
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
Utility
Manual Tuning
a b
k
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
To use these buttons, first press kENTER. Then select
the desired one with kCursor B / C and kENTER.
FM Mode
The station currently received can be confirmed from the
menu displayed on the TV screen. Various FM/AM tuner
operations can be performed from the Content window
d rather than controls on the front panel display. The
Content window is displayed when dTUNER is
pressed.
You can operate the FM/AM tuner from the Now Playing
view or the Browse view.
SCENE
CD
Screen buttons on the Now Playing view
c
d
e
f
g
Lights up when a station is received.
Stereo indicator
Lights up when a stereo broadcast is received. When
“Audio Mode” is set to “Mono,” the indicator does not
light.
Preset number
The selected preset number is displayed.
Band
The selected band (FM or AM) is displayed.
Frequency
The frequency currently received is displayed.
Frequency guide
The frequency currently received is displayed as a cursor
on the bar.
Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Now Playing view” for details.
Preset Select
You can call preset stations.
Preset -
Selects the previous preset number.
Preset +
Selects the next preset number.
Preset -8
Returns the previous page.
Preset +8
Goes to the next page.
Direct
Selects a station directly by entering the
preset number.
Memory
Registers the station currently received as
a preset station. Up to 40 FM/AM stations
can be registered.
En
59
PLAYBACK
MAIN
FM/AM tuning
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Operating from the Browse view
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
Now Playing
4
Switches the display to the Now Playing view.
AUDIO
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
NET
HDMI OUT
TUNER
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
a
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
a Preset station list
RADIO
The list of preset stations is displayed.
OPTION
ON SCREEN
b
b Screen button area
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
k
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Browse view” for details.
Screen buttons on the Browse view
To use these buttons, first press kCursor E. Then
select the desired one with kCursor B / C and
kENTER.
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
Utility
ENT
INPUT
Auto Preset
Detects stations with a strong signal and
automatically registers up to 40 stations,
beginning with the next number after the
current number.
Clear Preset
Clears registration of the preset station
currently selected.
Clear All Preset
Clears registration of all preset stations.
MUTE
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.
En
60
PLAYBACK
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect a SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to your SIRIUS-Ready receiver. SIRIUS Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US (except
Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country, R&B, Dance, Jazz, Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional and
college sports including play by play games from select leagues and teams. Additional programming includes expert sports talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, family programming, local traffic
and weather and news from your most trusted sources.
Once you’ve purchased a SIRIUS tuner you’ll need to activate it and subscribe to begin enjoying the service. Easy to follow installation and setup instructions are provided with the SIRIUS tuner. There
are a variety of programming packages available, including the option of adding “The Best of XM” programming to the SIRIUS service. The “Best of XM” service is not available to SIRIUS Canada
subscribers at this time. Please check with SIRIUS Canada for any updates using the numbers and web address below.
Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for children.
To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian customers can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit sirius.com (US) or siriuscanada.ca (Canada).
SIRIUS Radio Legal
SIRIUS and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS
subscription sold separately. Taxes and a one-time activation fee may apply. SIRIUS tuner required (sold separately) to receive the SIRIUS service. All programming and fees subject to change. It is prohibited
to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS Satellite Radio System.
Service not available in Alaska or Hawaii.
Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner
Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the SIRIUS
jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the instruction
manuals provided with the SiriusConnect tuner.
SiriusConnect Tuner and the antenna
(sold separately)
DOCK
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
1
2
ARC
SELECTABLE
ARC
SIRIUS
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
GND
PR
75
PB
• To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
signals, the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed at
or near a window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The
orientation of the antenna for the best reception differs depending
on the area. Refer to the instruction manuals provided with the
SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the antenna. You can
mount it indoors or outdoors.
• Use the Antenna information on the front panel display or the
SIRIUS information screen on the TV screen (☞p. 65) to check
the antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of the
antenna.
• You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall
outlet.
NOTES
• If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears on
the front panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner
or antenna is incorrect. In such cases, check the connection of the
SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna.
• If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears on the front panel display, this
unit does not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner.
VIDEO
Y
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(CD)
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
To the AC wall outlet
En
61
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
subscription
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
V-AUX
AV
1
DOCK
HDMI OUT
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
■ Displaying the SIRIUS ID of your
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you
need to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio
subscription. To activate the subscription you need the
d
SIRIUS ID which is uniquely assigned to the
SiriusConnect tuner. SIRIUS ID is 12-digit number
which is indicated on the package of the SiriusConnect
tuner and on the label of the SiriusConnect tuner.
SIRIUS ID is also configured on the front panel display
when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel
“0.”
SiriusConnect tuner
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
INPUT
MUTE
ENT
m
1
Press dSIRIUS.
2
Press m0 and then mENT to display the
SIRIUS ID of your SiriusConnect tuner.
“000 Sirius ID” and “xxxxxxxxxxxx”
(“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the 12-digit SIRIUS ID of
your SiriusConnect tuner) appears alternately on the
front panel display.
Write down the SIRIUS ID in the space provided
below.
d SIRIUS
m0
m ENT
3
Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate
your subscription.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information
Contact for activation
URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/
Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)
Status messages appear on the front panel display and
the TV screen during the activation. For details, see
“SIRIUS Satellite Radio™” (☞p. 130). Once the
activation is finished, “SUB UPDATED” appears.
The SIRIUS indicator lights up on the front panel
display and the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information
(such as channel number, channel name, category,
artist name, or song title) for the currently selected
channel appears on the front panel display. J1
ALL
184Weather
2
Search for a channel by using one of the
SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes.
All channel search mode
Selects a channel from the all channel list (☞p. 63).
Direct number access mode
Selects a channel directly by entering the channel
number (☞p. 63).
Press dSIRIUS to select “SIRIUS” as the
input source.
SIRIUS
• Before activating your subscription, you can only
select “184” or “000.”
• If a status message or an error message appears on the
front panel display or TV screen, refer to “SIRIUS
Satellite Radio™” (☞p. 130).
Category search mode
Selects a channel by category (☞p. 63).
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
operations
1
NOTES
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Preset search mode
Selects a channel from the preset channels (☞p. 64).
You can preset channels by registering them to specific
numbers, and later just select those numbers to tune in.
• SIRIUS Satellite Radio information can be displayed
on the front panel display and the TV screen (☞p. 65).
• If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe,
“CALL SIRIUS on the front panel display” or “CALL
888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE” appears on the
TV screen.
ID:________________________________________
Channel number Channel name
J 1 : When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit
automatically calls the previously selected channel.
En
62
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ All channel search mode
SOURCE RECEIVER
NOTE
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
3
4
Press eTUN./CH H / I repeatedly to search for
a channel within all channels.
4
AUDIO
AV
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
All channel search mode
DOCK
HDMI OUT
SIRIUS
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
BD
DVD
TV
e
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
CD
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
001Hits 1
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
ALL
RADIO
• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and
holding eTUN./CH H / I.
• You can skip channels to the previous or next category
by pressing eCATEGORY D / E.
OPTION
ON SCREEN
■ Category search mode
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
1
MUTE
REC
Press eCATEGORY D / E to select the
channel category.
When you select the category, the first channel in the
category is selected.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
m
Category
search mode
INPUT
SIRIUS
MUTE
The first channel in the category
CAT001
Pop
VOL.
L
SL
SBL
SW
C
R
SR
SBR
Category name
e TUN./CH H / I
e CATEGORY D / E
e MEMORY
m Numeric keys
m ENT
If you don’t operate within 10 seconds, the category
search mode returns to “ALL (All Channel Search).”
2
This unit skips the following channels in all channel
search mode or category search mode. This is not a
malfunction.
• channels that are locked (☞p. 65)
• channels that are not currently in service
• channels that you do not subscribe to
■ Direct number access mode
Registering and recalling the
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ channels
Up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels can be
registered as preset channels.
■ Registering preset channels
1
Press the mNumeric keys to enter the desired
three-digit channel number.
For example, to enter the number 123, press “1,” “2” and
then “3” of the mNumeric keys.
• When entering a one-digit or two-digit channel
number, enter the number using the mNumeric
keys and then press mENT to confirm your entry.
• This unit automatically accepts your entry if you do
not press mENT within a few seconds after entering
the number.
• If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:___” appears
on the front panel display. Enter the 4-digit Parental
Lock code number by using the mNumeric keys or
press mENT to cancel (☞p. 65).
• If the selected channel is not available, an advisory
message may appear. For details, refer to “SIRIUS
Satellite Radio™” (☞p. 130).
• If this unit is in preset search mode, a preset number is
selected instead of a channel number when you press
the mNumeric keys. To switch to direct number
access mode, press eTUN./CH H / I.
Search for a channel to be registered.
For details on searching channels, refer to the
following pages.
• All channel search mode (☞p. 63)
• Category search mode (☞p. 63)
• Direct number access mode (☞p. 63)
2
Use one of the following methods to
register the channel currently received.
■ Registering to a preset number for which
no channel has been registered
Press and hold eMEMORY for at least 2 second.
The channel will be automatically registered to the
lowest available preset number (or the next number after
the last to which a channel was registered).
SIRIUS
MEMORY
VOL.
P01:001Preset
Preset number
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Registered channel
While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel
display, press eTUN./CH H / I repeatedly
to search for a channel within the selected
channel category.
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and
holding eTUN./CH H / I.
En
63
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Designating a preset number for
registration
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
4
Press eMEMORY once.
AUDIO
2
SIRIUS
AV
1
2
3
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio™ information
4
MEMORY
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information
on the front panel display. J1
HDMI OUT
NOTE
CATEGORY
FM
Preset number
AM
PRESET
INFO
TUN./CH
e
MEMORY
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
BD
DVD
TV
f
CD
Press ePRESET F / G to select the preset number to
which the channel will be registered and then press
eMEMORY to register.
RADIO
OPTION
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
Channel to be
registered
If a status message or an error message appears on the
front panel display or TV screen, see “SIRIUS
Satellite Radio™” (☞p. 130).
Antenna
Antenna reception level, channel number
Signal reception level
Channel number
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
ON SCREEN
Previously
registered channel
(or “---” if no
channel has been
registered)
Composer name, channel number
VOL.
P01:--- << 001
DOCK
Composer
POP-UP
MENU
k
To cancel registration, press kRETURN or do not
operate the remote control for about 30 seconds.
■ Front panel display
SIRIUS
Press fINFO repeatedly to toggle the SIRIUS
Satellite Radio information display modes as
shown below.
■ Recalling a preset channel (Preset
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
m Specify preset numbers to recall registered channels.
Preset number
e MEMORY
e PRESET F / G
f INFO
k RETURN
m Numeric keys
ALL008
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Antenna
Signal reception is shown in four levels.
Channel
Channel number, channel name
DSP Program
Search mode)
1
MUTE
Signal reception level
MUTE
REC
INPUT
Search mode
ENT
Current sound program (☞p. 48), channel number
Category
Channel category, channel number
SIRIUS
P01
001Hits1
VOL.
Audio Decoder
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Press ePRESET F / G to change the preset
numbers (1 to 40).
Artist/Song
Current Audio Decoder (☞p. 44), channel number
Artist name, song title, channel number
Back to “Channel”
• Preset numbers to which no channel has been
registered are skipped.
• Preset numbers can also be selected by pressing
mNumeric keys.
J 1 : If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character
that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be
displayed with a space.
When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears.
En
64
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Navigating the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio™ from the Content window
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
4
e Channel Name
The channel name currently received is displayed.
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
HDMI OUT
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
The category of the channel is displayed.
2
AV
RADIO
The SIRIUS channel currently received can be
confirmed from the menu displayed on the TV screen.
Various SIRIUS Satellite Radio operations can be
d
performed from the Content window rather than controls
on the front panel display. The Content window is
displayed when
dSIRIUS is pressed.
You can operate the SIRIUS Satellite Radio from the
Now Playing view or the Browse view.
■ Operating from the Now Playing
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
view
k
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
HOLD
l
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
g Artist Name
Restricts the access to specified channel.
The artist name of the current song is displayed.
h Song Title
i
j
The title of the current song is displayed.
Composer Name
The composer name of the current song is displayed.
Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Now Playing view” for details.
When the parental lock function is enabled for a
particular channel, that channel is skipped in all channel
search mode and category search mode.
1
Use kCursor D / E to select a number, and
press kENTER to enter the selected
number.
2
3
Repeat step 1 to enter the desired 4-digit
code number.
Screen buttons on the Now Playing view
To use these buttons, first press kENTER. Then select
the desired one with kCursor B / C and kENTER.
b
c
e
j
a
d
f
g
h
i
Select a channel for reception.
Memory
Register the current channel as a preset
number. Up to 40 channels can be
registered.
Preset -
Select the previous preset number.
Preset +
Select the next preset number.
CAT -
Select the previous category.
CAT +
Select the next category.
CH -
Scan channels downwards from the
current channel.
CH +
Scan channels upwards from the current
channel.
Direct
Specify a specific channel by manually
entering the channel number.
Hold
Activate the hold function. The artist
name and song title currently received
will remain displayed.
INPUT
MUTE
a HOLD indicator
Blinks when lHOLD is pressed to activate the hold
d SIRIUS
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
l HOLD
Parental Lock
Radio Control
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
Utility
f Channel Category
b
function. The artist name and song title currently received
will remain displayed. Press lHOLD again to cancel the
hold function.
Signal reception level
Indicates the signal reception level.
Weak signal
Strong signal
Use kCursor C to select “Enter,” and press
kENTER to confirm the 4-digit code
number.
Selecting “Clear” and pressing kENTER clears all
the code entered.
4
Use kCursor B / C to select the category
and press kENTER.
Continues to the
next page
c Preset number
The selected preset number is displayed.
d Channel number
The channel number currently received is displayed.
En
65
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
5
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
AUDIO
Use kCursor B / C to select the channel to
be locked and press kENTER.
Check mark
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
NET
Scroll
1 Page Up
Switches the scroll target (channel name, channel
category, artist name, song title, or composer name).
1 Page Down
Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.
Browse
HDMI OUT
TUNER
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
Now Playing
Switches the display to the Browse view.
CATEGORY
■ Operating from the Browse view
TUN./CH
Switches the display to the Now Playing view.
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
k
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
When kENTER is pressed, the selected channel is
received for confirmation. Each time kENTER is
pressed after that, lock switches between on and off.
To lock channels in other categories, press
MUTE
kRETURN to display the category selection screen,
REC
a
and follow the procedure described above.
b
a Preset station list
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
10
4
8
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k RETURN
k ENTER
m Numeric keys
m ENT
m
NOTES
• If a code number is already registered and the different
code number is entered, “Wrong” appears. In this case,
start over from step 1.
• If you forget the parental lock code or want to change
it, reset it using “SR PIN” (☞p. 119).
Receiving locked channels
Use direct number access mode (☞p. 63) or preset
search mode (☞p. 64) to receive locked channels. When
a locked channel is received, “LOCKED” is displayed
followed by the parental lock code input screen. Use
mNumeric keys to enter the 4-digit code number.
The list of preset stations is displayed.
b Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Browse view” for details.
Screen buttons on the Browse view
To use these buttons, first press kCursor E. Then
select the desired one with kCursor B / C and
kENTER.
Utility
Parental Lock
Restricts the access to specified channel.
Clear Preset
Clears registration of the preset station
currently selected.
Clear All Preset
Clears registration of all preset stations.
En
66
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
Playing back tunes on the PC
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
You can enjoy playback of audio files stored on PCs connected to this unit via your network. To play back audio files on your PC, you need to install Windows Media
Player on the PC and configure the media sharing setting of Windows Media Player.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
4
AV
1
2
3
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
HDMI OUT
TUNER
SIRIUS
d
NET
If you do not use a DHCP server, configure the
network parameters (IP address, etc.) of this unit
manually (☞p. 108).
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
TUN./CH
Windows Media Player setup
MEMORY
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
BD
DVD
TV
CD
1
RADIO
OPTION
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
k
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
Screen buttons on the Browse view
For a complete list of status messages that appear on
the front panel display and GUI screen, see
“Network” (☞p. 131).
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
ON SCREEN
Playback of PC music contents
POP-UP
MENU
Install Windows Media Player on your PC.
You can download the installer of Windows Media
Player from the Microsoft website, or use the upgrade
function of the installed Microsoft Windows Media
Player.
The PC music contents can be operated from the menu
displayed on the TV screen.
You can operate the PC contents from the Now Playing
view or the Browse view.
■ Operating from the Browse view
2
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
Turn on your PC then allow media sharing.
Activate Windows Media Player first, enable the media
sharing and then select this unit as a device to which
the media is shared.
ENT
NOTES
INPUT
MUTE
d NET
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
• Some security software installed on your PC (antivirus software, firewall software, etc.) may block the
access of this unit to your PC. In such cases, configure
the security software appropriately.
• You can connect this unit to up to 16 PC servers, and
each server must be connected to the same subnet as
this unit.
e
f
h
10 Pages Down
Goes to 10 pages forwards or backwards.
1 Page Up
Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.
d
g
h
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
10 Pages Up
1 Page Down
a b c
MUTE
To use these buttons, first press kCursor E. Then
select the desired one with kCursor B / C and
kENTER.
Repeat icon
Shuffle icon
Play icon
Current directory name
Menu items
Album art / Input icon
Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Browse view” for details.
Current menu number / Number of all menu items
Now Playing
Switches the display to the Now Playing view.
1
2
Press dNET repeatedly to select “PC” as
the input source.
Press kCursor B / C to select a PC server
and music file to play back.
• To select a PC server, folder or file, press
kCursor B / C.
• To confirm the selection, press kENTER.
• To return to the previous menu, press kRETURN.
3
Press kENTER to start playback.
The Now Playing view appears during playback.
En
67
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Playing back tunes on the PC
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Operating from the Now Playing
SOURCE RECEIVER
view
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
V-AUX
a b c
AV
1
Screen buttons on the Now Playing view
To use these buttons, first press kENTER. Then select
the desired one with kCursor B / C and kENTER.
Play Control
Operates the basic playback functions of PC.
DOCK
■ Compatibility of Digital Media
Controller
A DLNA-compliant Digital Media Controller (DMC)
device can also be used to control music playback. Refer
to “Using a PC to control this unit over a network”
(☞p. 88) for details. J1, J2
HDMI OUT
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
TUN./CH
f
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
e
f
d
h
i
g
p (Play)
Starts playback.
s (Stop)
Stops playback.
e (Pause)
Stops playback temporarily.
b (Skip -)
Skips to the beginning of the currently
playing song. Press kENTER at the
beginning of the song to skip to a previous
song.
a (Skip +)
Skips to the beginning of the next song.
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
INPUT
MUTE
ENT
a
k b
c
d
e
l f
g
h
i
Repeat icon
Shuffle icon
Play icon
Album art
Artist name
Album title
Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Now Playing view” for details.
Song title
Elapsed time
• You can switch the information displayed on the front
panel display by pressing fINFO (☞p. 10).
• Album art is available only when the file contains
image data.
f INFO
k Cursor B / C
k ENTER
lp
ls
le
la
lb
CAUTION
When DMC controls are used to adjust volume,
playback volume may be unexpectedly loud. This
could result in damage to this unit or the speakers.
“Max Volume” can be used to specify the maximum
volume level to prevent excessively loud playback
(☞p. 103).
■ Operating basic playback functions
with the remote control
Scroll
Switches the scroll target (artist name, album title, or
song title).
Browse
Switches the display to the Browse view.
Use the following remote control keys to operate
(playback, stop, skip, etc.) your PC contents.
lp
Play
ls
Stop
le
Switches between playback and pause.
la
Skip forward during playback
lb
Skip backward during playback
■ Shuffle/repeat playback
Use the Option menu to apply playback shuffle and
repeat settings. Refer to “Shuffle playback” (☞p. 55)
and “Repeat playback” (☞p. 55) for details.
J 1 : A shortcut button cannot be registered when a DMC is used.
J 2 : Set “DMC Control” to “Disable” to automatically play back the
last song played when this unit is turned on.
En
68
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
Listening to the Internet Radio
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
You can listen to Internet Radio stations using the vTuner Internet Radio station database service particularly customized for this unit, providing a database of over 2000
radio stations. Also, you can store your favorite stations with bookmarks.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
4
AV
1
2
3
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
HDMI OUT
TUNER
SIRIUS
d
NET
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
BD
DVD
TV
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
k
• To use this feature, your network must be connected to
the Internet.
• A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem,
ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results, and a
broadband connection is strongly recommended (i.e. a
cable modem, an xDSL modem, etc.). For detailed
information, consult with your ISP.
• If you do not use a DHCP server, configure the
network parameters (IP address, etc.) of this unit
manually (☞p. 108).
• Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the
access of this unit to Internet Radio stations. In such
cases, configure the security settings appropriately.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
• Some Internet Radio stations may not be played.
Listening to Internet Radio
■ Operating from the Browse view
a
MUTE
d NET
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
For a complete list of status messages that appear on
the front panel display and GUI screen, see
“Network” (☞p. 131)
The Internet Radio can be operated from the menu
displayed on the TV screen.
You can operate the Internet Radio from the Now
Playing view or the Browse view.
10 Pages Down
Goes to 10 pages forwards or backwards.
b
c
d
e
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
f
a
b
c
d
e
ENT
INPUT
10 Pages Up
f
Play icon
Current directory name
Menu items
Channel art
Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Browse view” for details.
Current menu number / Number of all menu items
Screen buttons on the Browse view
Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.
Now Playing
Switches the display to the Now Playing view.
1
2
To use these buttons, first press kCursor E. Then
select the desired one with kCursor B / C and
kENTER.
Bookmark On
3
Press dNET repeatedly to select “NET
RADIO” as the input source.
Press kCursor B / C to select an item to
play back.
• To select an item, press kCursor B / C.
• To confirm the selection, press kENTER.
• To return to the previous menu, press kRETURN.
Press kENTER to start playback.
The Now Playing view appears during playback.
The selected Internet Radio station is added to the
Bookmarks list in “NET RADIO.”
Bookmark Off
This item is displayed in the bookmark directory.
The selected Internet Radio station is removed from the
Bookmarks list.
En
69
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Listening to the Internet Radio
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Operating from the Now Playing
SOURCE RECEIVER
view
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
Switches the display to the Browse view.
AUDIO
a
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
Browse
■ Operating basic playback functions
with the remote control
HDMI OUT
Use the following remote control keys to operate
(playback, stop) the Internet Radio.
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
f
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
e
b
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
lp
Play
ls
Stop
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
cd
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
INPUT
MUTE
ENT
k a
b
c
l d
e
Play icon
Channel art
Elapsed time
Current station name
Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Now Playing view” for details.
• You can switch the information displayed on the front
panel display by pressing fINFO (☞p. 10).
• Channel art is available only when the selected
channel contains image data.
You can also register your favorite Internet Radio
stations on this unit by accessing the website with the
web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you
need the vTuner ID of this unit and your e-mail
address to create your personal account. For details,
refer to the help information on the website.
URL: http://yradio.vtuner.com/
NOTE
To clear the personal account such as vTuner ID or email address, perform “NETWORK” of
“INITIALIZE” in the Advanced Setup menu
(☞p. 120).
Screen buttons on the Now Playing view
f INFO
k Cursor B / C
k ENTER
ls
lp
To use these buttons, first press kENTER. Then select
the desired one with kCursor B / C and kENTER.
Bookmark On
The station currently being played back is added to the
Bookmarks list in “NET RADIO.”
Play Control
The following operation is available.
s (Stop)
Stops playback.
En
70
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
Using the Rhapsody® service
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
Prohibition
4
AUDIO
5
1
V-AUX
It is strictly prohibited to modify, reproduce, reverse-engineer or use this unit and/or built-in software for use other than audiovisual purposes.
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
HDMI OUT
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
The Rhapsody® service is the power behind the Rhapsody® Media Player (the Rhapsody® player software that you can download to your computer). Rhapsody® service
supplies the music, keeps My Library up to date, provides you with Rhapsody® channels, the Playlist Central online community, and manages your downloads. Your
d
software connects to Rhapsody® service through the internet. Because your account information and Rhapsody® content are on servers instead of any individual computer,
your music is infinitely portable. Much of what you see in the Display area comes from Rhapsody® service. What you can do with Rhapsody® service depends on your
subscription. You can use Rhapsody® service for free, or get even more from a paid membership. The Rhapsody® service also brings you Rhapsody® Online, a
streamlined, internet version of Rhapsody® that you can access from almost anywhere. Just sign in to your Rhapsody® account to start letting the Rhapsody® service work
for you.
For more information, http://www.rhapsody.com/
j
Rhapsody® account sign-in
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
k
When you select “Rhapsody” for the first time, the signin screen appears. Sign in to your Rhapsody® account to
start using the Rhapsody service on this unit.
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
3
Use kCursor D / E to select “Rhapsody”
and press kCursor B.
4
Press kCursor B / C to select “Sign In” and
then press kENTER.
The following display appears when “Sign In” has not
been completed yet. Read the description and then
press kENTER. J1
Use the Utility function later to view information for
your Rhapsody® account.
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
1
2
Press jON SCREEN.
Use kCursor B / C to select “Input” and
press kENTER.
d NET
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
If “Rhapsody Trial” is selected, the URL for free 30day trial service content is displayed. You can get
started with a free trial by registering an account in
the specified website.
Continues to the
next page
J 1 : When “Sign In” has not been completed yet, this description can
be directly displayed by pressing dNET repeatedly to select
“Rhapsody” as input source.
En
71
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Using the Rhapsody® service
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
5
6
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
V-AUX
AV
1
DOCK
HDMI OUT
CATEGORY
FM
Press kENTER to enter the User Name
entry screen.
Use kCursor B / C / D / E and kENTER to
enter your user name password (up to
64 characters) and then select “OK” and
press kENTER.
7
8
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
Use kCursor B / C / D / E and kENTER to
enter your password (up to 64 characters)
and then select “OK” and press kENTER.
“Please wait” appears followed by the confirmation
screen.
AM
PRESET
Press kENTER to enter the User Password
entry screen.
TUN./CH
Playback of Rhapsody® contents
The Rhapsody can be operated from the content window
on the TV screen.
You can operate the Rhapsody from the Now Playing
view or the Browse view.
■ Operating from the Browse view
a b c
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
NOTE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
If registration failed, the error message appears. In
this case, read the message and start all over again.
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
9
k
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
Press kENTER.
d
f
e
The Rhapsody Browse view is displayed.
To clear the characters entered in step 6 and 8, select
“Clear” and press kENTER.
g
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
a
b
c
d
e
f
MUTE
g
Repeat icon
Shuffle icon
Play icon
Menu items
Album art / Input icon
Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Browse view” for details.
Current menu number / Number of all menu items
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
En
72
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Using the Rhapsody® service
ZONE 2
CODE SET
To use these buttons, first press kCursor E. Then
select the desired one with kCursor B / C and
kENTER.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
■ Operating from the Now Playing
Screen buttons on the Browse view
SOURCE RECEIVER
1
2
4
Now Playing
view
Switches the display to the Now Playing view.
a b c
AV
1
2
3
5
6
MULTI
You can navigate the Rhapsody menu with the following
remote control buttons.
Utility
DOCK
HDMI OUT
TUNER
SIRIUS
d
NET
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
Add track to My
Library
Adds the track currently selected to “My
Library.”
Add album to My
Library
Adds the album currently selected to “My
Library.”
Add CH to My
Library
Adds the channel currently selected to
“My Library.”
Remove from My
Library
Removes the content currently selected
from “My Library.”
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
ON SCREEN
Plays back the song or album highlighted
in the list.
f
MEMORY
MOVIE
Play
TUN./CH
POP-UP
MENU
k
1
2
Press dNET repeatedly to select
“Rhapsody” as the input source.
Press kCursor B / C to select an item to
play back.
• To select an item, folder or file, press kCursor B / C.
• To confirm the selection, press kENTER.
• To return to the previous menu, press kRETURN.
Rhapsody Music
Guide
Select a track from the lists organized by
category (artist, album, etc.).
Rhapsody Radio
Select a network radio channel from the
lists of the channels provided by
Rhapsody.
Search
Use the software keyboard to search the
desired item (artist, album, etc.) by
keyword.
My Library
Select a track from items (artist, album,
etc.) added to “My Library.”
MUTE
REC
10 Pages Up
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
10 Pages Down
Goes to 10 pages forwards or backwards.
INPUT
MUTE
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
d NET
f INFO
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.
3
Press kENTER to start playback.
The Now Playing view appears during playback.
e
f
d
h
k
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
g
i
j
Repeat icon
Shuffle icon
Play icon
Album art
Artist name
Album title
Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Now Playing view” for details.
Song title
Total playback time
Progress bar
Elapsed time
• You can switch the information displayed on the front
panel display by pressing fINFO (☞p. 10).
• Album art is available only when the album contains
image data.
En
73
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Using the Rhapsody® service
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Screen buttons on the Now Playing view
SOURCE RECEIVER
To use these buttons, first press kENTER. Then select
the desired one with kCursor B / C and kENTER.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
V-AUX
AV
1
Play Control
Operates the basic playback functions of the Rhapsody.
DOCK
■ Operating basic playback functions
with the remote control
Use the following remote control keys to operate the
Rhapsody.
lp
Play
ls
Stop
le
Switches between playback and pause.
la
Skip forward during playback
lb
Skip backward during playback
HDMI OUT
p (Play)
Starts playback.
s (Stop)
Stops playback.
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
e (Pause)
Stops playback temporarily.
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
b (Skip -)
Skips to the beginning of the currently
playing song. Press kENTER at the
beginning of the song to skip to a previous
song.
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
BD
DVD
TV
PRESET
TUN./CH
SCENE
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
k
a (Skip +)
Skips to the beginning of the next song.
■ Shuffle/repeat playback
Use the Option menu to apply playback shuffle and
repeat settings. Refer to “Shuffle playback” (☞p. 55)
and “Repeat playback” (☞p. 55) for details.
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
Utility
MUTE
REC
l
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
Add track to My
Library
Adds the track currently selected to “My
Library.”
Add album to My
Library
Adds the album currently selected to “My
Library.”
INPUT
MUTE
Scroll
Switches the scroll target (artist name, album name, or
song name).
k Cursor B / C
k ENTER
lp
ls
le
la
lb
Browse
Switches the display to the Browse view.
En
74
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
Listening to the SIRIUS Internet Radio
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
It’s easy to enjoy SIRIUS entertainment at home. Listen to over 80 channels of commercial-free music, plus sports talk, news and entertainment. It all comes through your
audio / video receiver and high-speed Internet connection.
If you’re not a SIRIUS subscriber, you can sign up today for a PREMIUM SIRIUS Internet Radio subscription at www.sirius.com .
Current subscribers can add a PREMIUM SIRIUS Internet Radio subscription to an existing account.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
V-AUX
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
NET
HDMI OUT
TUNER
d
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
BD
DVD
TV
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
CD
RADIO
j
SIRIUS Internet Radio account signin
4
Press kCursor B / C to select “Sign In” or
“SIRIUS IR Trial” and then press kENTER.
6
When you use the SIRIUS Internet Radio service for the
first time, follow the procedure below to sign in to your
account for the service.
Use kCursor B / C / D / E and kENTER to
enter your user name password (up to
64 characters) and then select “OK” and
press kENTER.
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
k
1
2
3
Press jON SCREEN.
Use kCursor B / C to select “Input” and
press kENTER.
Use kCursor D / E to select “SIRIUS IR”
and press kCursor B.
The following display appears when “Sign In” has not
been completed yet. Read the description and then
press kENTER. J1
If “SIRIUS IR Trial” is selected, the confirmation
message and the URL regarding the terms of trial
service are displayed. Press kCursor D / E to select
“OK” to continue. If “Successfully logged into
account” is displayed, press kENTER to enable the
SIRIUS Internet Radio Browse view.
To clear the characters entered in step 6 and 8, select
“Clear” and press kENTER.
7
MUTE
5
Press kENTER to enter the User Name
entry screen.
Press kENTER to enter the User Password
entry screen.
Continues to the
next page
d NET
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
J 1 : When “Sign In” has not been completed yet, this description can
be directly displayed by pressing dNET repeatedly to select
“SIRIUS IR” as input source.
En
75
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Listening to the SIRIUS Internet Radio
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
8
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
4
AV
1
2
3
5
6
MULTI
Use kCursor B / C / D / E and kENTER to
enter your password (up to 64 characters)
and then select “OK” and press kENTER.
SIRIUS
If registration failed, the error message appears. In
this case, read the message and start all over again.
■ Operating from the Browse view
d
NET
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
TUN./CH
MEMORY
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
a
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
9
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
To use these buttons, first press kCursor E. Then
select the desired one with kCursor B / C and
kENTER.
NOTE
DOCK
CATEGORY
Screen buttons on the Browse view
The SIRIUS Internet Radio tuner can be operated from
the content window on the TV screen.
You can operate the SIRIUS Internet Radio from the
Now Playing view or the Browse view.
“Please wait...” is first displayed, followed by
confirmation screen.
HDMI OUT
TUNER
Navigating the SIRIUS Internet
Radio menu
k
b
c
d
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
a
b
c
d
INPUT
MUTE
e
d NET
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.
Now Playing
e
5
Goes to 10 pages forwards or backwards.
1 Page Down
MUTE
REC
1
10 Pages Down
1 Page Up
Press kENTER.
The SIRIUS Internet Radio Browse view is displayed.
10 Pages Up
Play icon
Menu items
Channel art
Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Browse view” for details.
Current menu number / Number of all menu items
Switches the display to the Now Playing view.
You can navigate the SIRIUS Internet Radio menu with
the following remote control buttons.
1
2
3
Press dNET repeatedly to select “SIRIUS
IR.”
Press kCursor B / C / D / E to select a
music file to play back.
• To select a file or folder, press kCursor B / C.
• To confirm the selection, press kENTER.
• To return to the previous menu, press kRETURN.
Press kENTER to start playback.
The Now Playing view appears during playback.
En
76
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Listening to the SIRIUS Internet Radio
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Operating from the Now Playing
SOURCE RECEIVER
view
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
4
Switches the scroll target (artist name, album name, or
song name).
AUDIO
a
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
Scroll
Browse
HDMI OUT
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
TUN./CH
f
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
c
d
b
f
g
Switches the display to the Browse view.
e
RADIO
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
a
k b
c
d
l e
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
INPUT
MUTE
with the remote control
Use the following remote control keys to operate the
SIRIUS Internet Radio.
OPTION
ON SCREEN
■ Operating basic playback functions
ENT
f
g
Play icon
Channel art
Artist name
Channel name
Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Now Playing view” for details.
Song title
Elapsed time
lp
Play
ls
Stop
• You can switch the information displayed on the front
panel display by pressing fINFO (☞p. 10).
• Channel art is available only when the selected
channel contains image data.
Screen buttons on the Now Playing view
f INFO
k Cursor B / C
k ENTER
ls
lp
To use these buttons, first press kENTER. Then select
the desired one with kCursor B / C and kENTER.
Play Control
Stops the current playback.
s (Stop)
Stops playback.
En
77
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
Using shortcut function
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Use this feature to access the desired music sources
(WAV, MP3 and WMA files on the connected PC,
Internet Radio Stations, SIRIUS Internet Radio, and
Rhapsody® music contents) directly. You can preset up
to 40 items for above input sources.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
V-AUX
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
NET
HDMI OUT
TUNER
MEMORY
■ Assigning the items to the preset number
CATEGORY
FM
3
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
BD
DVD
TV
TUN./CH
e
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
1
Select a desired content you want to assign
to a preset number, and then play back the
content.
2
Press eMEMORY.
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
VOL.
SW
C
L
R
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
09:Empty
AM
PRESET
Press ePRESET F / G or mNumeric keys
to select the preset number that you want to
assign.
Valid numbers as the preset number are “01” to “40.”
SCENE
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
k
MUTE
This unit automatically selects an empty preset number
and the following display appears.
MEMORY
01:Empty
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
m
INPUT
MUTE
e MEMORY
e PRESET F / G
k RETURN
m Numeric keys
ENT
4
Press eMEMORY.
The following display appears on the front panel
display and the preset content is set.
VOL.
VOL.
L
SL
SBL
SW
C
R
SR
SBR
Preset number (Blinks)
• To automatically assign the selected content to an
empty preset number, press and hold eMEMORY for
at least 2 seconds with step 2. In this case, the
following steps are unnecessary.
• To cancel the preset, press kRETURN.
• When you do not complete each of the following steps
within 30 seconds, the memory preset mode is
automatically canceled. In this case, start over from
step 2.
09:Memorized
SW
C
L
R
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
■ Selecting the item assigned to the preset
number
Press ePRESET F / G or mNumeric keys to
select the preset number to which the desired
item is assigned to select the item as the input
source.
This unit starts the playback of the source assigned to the
selected preset number.
NOTES
• “xx:Empty” appears on the front panel display when
you select the preset number to which no items are
assigned.
• This unit does not recall the correct item assigned to
the selected preset number in the following cases:
– the PC which stores the selected item is turned off
or disconnected from the network.
– the selected Internet Radio station, Rhapsody
service or SIRIUS Internet Radio is temporary
unavailable or out of service.
– the directory of the selected item has been changed.
This unit stores the relative position of the preset items
in a directory or playlist, and does not recall the correct
item by using mNumeric keys if you add or delete
music files to or from the same directory or playlist as
the preset items. In such cases, preset the desired item to
the preset numbers again.
We recommend the following methods:
PC server
Create playlists containing the desired content, and then
assign the top item of each playlist to a preset number.
To change the content assigned to preset numbers,
replace the content registered with a playlist with new
content without deleting the playlist.
En
78
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Once you have connected a Universal Dock for iPod (such as the YDS-12, sold separately) to this unit, you can enjoy playback of your iPod/iPhone using the remote
control supplied with this unit. When playing back from an iPod/iPhone, you can also use the compressed music enhancer sound programs to give compressed audio
formats such as MP3 a sharper, more dynamic sound (☞p. 47). A Yamaha iPod wireless system (YID-W10, sold separately) can also be connected to this unit to play back
iPod/iPhone with wireless connection.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
V-AUX
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
d
Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™
HDMI OUT
• When playing back iPod/iPhone with wired
connection
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
TUN./CH
f
Refer to “Connecting the Universal Dock for iPod.”
CAUTION
To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode
before connecting the Universal Dock for iPod.
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
• When playing back iPod/iPhone with
wireless connection
Refer to “Playing iPod™/iPhone™ with wireless
connection” (☞p. 81).
Connecting the Universal Dock for
iPod
Switch this unit on and place your iPod/iPhone in the
dock. The unit is now ready for playback.
DOCK
VOL.
iPodconnected
Menu browse control:
Plays the iPod/iPhone while viewing the menu displayed
on the TV. Refer to “Playing iPod/iPhone from the menu
screen (Menu browse control)” (☞p. 80).
Simple remote control:
Plays audio and video through this unit while viewing
the menu displayed on the iPod/iPhone screen. Refer to
“Operating basic playback functions via the remote
control (Simple remote control)” (☞p. 81).
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
DOCK
Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the
DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. Refer to the
operating instructions of the Universal Dock for iPod for
information on how to connect your iPod/iPhone.
NETWORK
SIRIUS
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PB
INPUT
MUTE
d DOCK
f INFO
• iPod touch, iPod (4th Gen/5th Gen/Classic), iPod
nano, iPod mini, iPhone, iPhone 3G, and iPhone 3GS
are supported (As of March 2010).
• When connecting iPhone, iPhone 3G and iPhone 3GS,
use a YDS-12.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on
the model or the software version of your iPod/iPhone.
• Some functions may not be available for some
Universal Dock for iPod models. This explanation
focuses on the YDS-12.
Universal Dock
for iPod
After setting your iPod/iPhone in your dock, just press
dDOCK to switch to DOCK input to play your iPod/
iPhone.
The iPod/iPhone can be operated in the following two
ways.
VIDEO
Y
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
OPTI
(CD)
Locate the dock at the distance as far as from
the unit.
( TV
AV
• Song information (artist, album, song) is displayed on
the front panel. Press fINFO repeatedly to display
subsequent/previous information.
• The Yamaha logo is displayed on the iPod screen
when iPod stationed in the Universal Dock for iPod
(does not apply to the iPod touch or iPhone).
• Manual control of the iPod/iPhone is not possible
while the iPod stationed in the Universal Dock for
iPod.
When this unit is in standby mode, iPod/iPhone can be
charged automatically (☞p. 89).
En
79
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Playing iPod/iPhone from the menu
screen (Menu browse control)
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
10 Pages Up
■ Operating from the Now Playing
view
AUDIO
5
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
V-AUX
AV
1
DOCK
HDMI OUT
CATEGORY
FM
■ Operating from the Browse view
TUN./CH
MEMORY
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
BD
DVD
TV
Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
CD
RADIO
b
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
k
c
a
d
POP-UP
MENU
e
MUTE
Switches the display to the Now Playing view.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
a
b
c
d
INPUT
MUTE
e
Close
Returns to the video playback, turning off the menu
display.
REC
Input name / List name
Menu items
Input icon
Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Browse view” for details.
Current menu number / Number of all menu items
1
2
d DOCK
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.
Press kCursor B / C to select the content
(music or video) that you want to play, and
press kENTER. J1
g
i
j
h
i
j
k
Repeat icon
Shuffle icon
Play icon
Album image
Artist name
Album title
Screen button area
Buttons for available operations are displayed. See
“Screen buttons on the Now Playing view” for details.
Song title
Remaining time
Progress bar
Elapsed time
Screen buttons on the Now Playing view
Screen buttons on the Browse view
To use these buttons, first press kCursor E. Then
select the desired one with kCursor B / C and
kENTER.
e
f
d
h
k
Now Playing
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
a b c
Goes to 10 pages forwards or backwards.
AM
PRESET
INFO
10 Pages Down
The iPod/iPhone can be operated from the menu
displayed on the TV screen.
d
You can operate the iPod/iPhone from the Now Playing
view or the Browse view.
3
Press kCursor B / C to select iPod/iPhone
menu items, and press kENTER to play.
To use these buttons, first press kENTER. Then select
the desired one with kCursor B / C and kENTER.
The Now Playing view appears during playback. J2
J 1 : Videos will not be displayed when your iPod or Universal Dock
for iPod do not support the browser function for browsing video
files.
J 2 : When selecting the video content, the following display is not
displayed.
En
80
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Play Control
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
Operates the basic playback functions of iPod/iPhone.
AUDIO
AV
1
DOCK
d
p (Play)
Starts playback.
s (Stop)
Stops playback.
e (Pause)
Stops playback temporarily.
b (Skip -)
Skips to the beginning of the currently
playing song. Press kENTER at the
beginning of the song to skip to a
previous song.
HDMI OUT
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
Skips to the beginning of the next song.
w (Scan -)
Searches backwards.
f (Scan +)
Searches forwards.
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
a (Skip +)
k
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
Scroll
Switches the scroll target (artist name, album name, or
l song name).
REC
HOLD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
Use the following remote control keys to operate
(playback, stop, skip, etc.) your iPod/iPhone.
Press lREC to enable the Simple remote control.
Press lREC again to return to the Menu browse
control.
dDOCK
Switches to the DOCK (iPod) input.
kCursor B / C
Move the cursor up and down to different
fields.
kRETURN
Returns to the previous menu.
kENTER
Enables the selected menu.
lw
Searches backwards while held down.
lf
Searches forwards while held down.
lb
Skips to the beginning of the currently
playing song. Pressing repeatedly skips
one song backwards with each press.
la
Skips to the beginning of the next song.
ls
Stops playback.
le
Switches between playback and pause.
lp
Switches between playback and pause.
Browse
Switches the display to the Browse view.
INPUT
Close
MUTE
Returns to the video playback, turning off the menu
display.
d DOCK
k Cursor B / C
k ENTER
k RETURN
l REC
ls
le
lp
lw
lf
lb
la
Operating basic playback functions
via the remote control (Simple
remote control)
Playing iPod™/iPhone™ with
wireless connection
A Yamaha iPod wireless system (YID-W10, sold
separately) can be connected to this unit to play back
iPod/iPhone with wireless connection. The iPod/iPhone
can be used as the remote control. J1
■ Connecting the Yamaha iPod
wireless transmitter and playing
back iPod/iPhone
Use the dedicated cable to connect the receiver of the
Wireless System for iPod to the DOCK jack on the rear
panel of this unit. Refer to the operating instructions of
the YID-W10 for more information.
CAUTION
To prevent accidents, unplug the power cable of this
unit before connecting the receiver of the Wireless
System for iPod.
Continues to the
next page
J 1 : Video signals cannot be transmitted wirelessly.
En
81
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Place the iPod/iPhone in the wireless transmitter. Setup
is complete.
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
1
V-AUX
DOCK
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
NET
d
When “iPod Interlock” → “Volume” in the Input
menu is set to “Off,” the volume of this unit is not
adjusted when iPod/iPhone volume controls are
adjusted (☞p. 89).
VOL.
iPodconnected
L
SL
SBL
SW
C
R
SR
SBR
HDMI OUT
TUNER
• Adjusting volume control on the iPod/iPhone also adjusts
the volume (max 0.0 dB) of this unit.
4
AUDIO
5
Use iPod/iPhone to start playback.
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
DOCK
CAUTION
NETWORK
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SIRIUS
COMPONENT
VIDEO
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
PR
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
PB
Yamaha Wireless
System for iPod
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
O
(CD)
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
MUTE
OPTICAL
3
12
REC
INPUT
VIDEO
Y
B
Position the receiver as far as possible from the unit.
ENT
When this unit is in standby mode, iPod/iPhone can be
charged automatically, if “Standby Charge” is set to
“Auto” (☞p. 89) or “Power & Input” of “iPod Interlock”
is set to “On” (☞p. 89).
d DOCK
• This unit, which is placed in the main zone, functions as
follows when iPod/iPhone controls are used to start
playback.
– The input source switches to DOCK (iPod) when this
unit is turned on.
– When this unit is in standby mode when iPod/iPhone
playback starts, this unit turns on and the input source
switches to DOCK (iPod). J1
• This unit automatically enters standby mode when the
following operations are performed.
– iPod/iPhone is removed from the YID-W10
– iPod/iPhone is not operated for a while after playback
is stopped
When iPod/iPhone controls are used to adjust volume,
playback volume may be unexpectedly loud. This
could result in damage to this unit or the speakers. If
the volume suddenly increases during playback,
immediately remove the iPod/iPhone from the
Universal Dock for iPod. “Max Volume” can be used
to specify the maximum volume level to prevent
excessively loud playback (☞p. 103).
• Pressing dDOCK also switches the input source to
DOCK (iPod).
• When a menu is operated, this function is not
activated.
• When “iPod Interlock” → “Power & Input” in the
Input menu is set to “Off,” the power and the input
source do not switch automatically (☞p. 89).
J 1 : This function is also activated when sound of application is
reproduced or ringtone is received.
En
82
PLAYBACK
MAIN
ZONE 2
Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as the YBA-10, sold separately) to this unit and enjoy wireless playback from Bluetooth-compatible
portable music players. J1
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
1
V-AUX
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
NOTE
d
HDMI OUT
When playing back from a Bluetooth component for the first time, you must first pair the devices (register the Bluetooth components). When establishing a wireless connection
you must carry out pairing on both this unit and on the Bluetooth component.
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
e
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
BD
DVD
TV
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver
Pairing Bluetooth™ components
SCENE
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the
t DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit.
The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connection will be
k complete when this unit is turned on.
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
DOCK
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
10
4
NETWORK
Be sure to carry out pairing when connecting a Bluetooth
component for the first time, or when settings have been deleted.
Refer to the operating instructions of your Bluetooth
component as necessary when carrying out pairing.
The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be
paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When
the ninth device is paired, the pairing settings for the
device which has not been used for the longest period
of time will be deleted.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
8
ENT
PB
Yamaha Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver
VIDEO
Y
MUTE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(CD)
d DOCK
e MEMORY
k Cursor B / C
k ENTER
k RETURN
t OPTION
Press tOPTION to display the Option menu
and use kCursor B / C to select “Pairing.”
OPTION
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Pairing
4
Press kENTER to start pairing.
DOCK
VOL.
Searching...
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
SIRIUS
PR
INPUT
3
OPTI
( TV
1
2
Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.
Turn on the Bluetooth component you want
to pair with and set it to pairing mode.
• To cancel pairing, press kRETURN.
• You can also press and hold eMEMORY on the
remote control to begin pairing.
Continues to the
next page
AV
CAUTION
To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode
before connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
J 1 : This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)
of the Bluetooth profile.
En
83
PLAYBACK
MAIN
Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
5
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
4
AUDIO
AV
1
2
3
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
When the device is recognized, it will appear in the
Bluetooth component list, for example as “YBA-10
YAMAHA.”
d
HDMI OUT
TUNER
SIRIUS
Make sure the Bluetooth component
recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver.
NET
Using Bluetooth™ components
When pairing is complete, perform the following
procedure to achieve a wireless connection between this
unit and the Bluetooth component. When the wireless
connection is complete, Bluetooth components can be
played back.
3
When wireless connection is complete
DOCK
FM
AM
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
6
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
from the Bluetooth component list, and
enter a pass key “0000” into the Bluetooth
component. J1
Depending on Bluetooth components, a wireless
connection is established automatically or by
operating the Bluetooth components. In that case, it is
not necessary to carry out the following procedure.
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RETURN
t
VOLUME
ENTER
When pairing occurs correctly
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
k
DOCK
Completed
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
1
2
Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.
Press tOPTION to display the Option
menu.
VOL.
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
BTconnected
CATEGORY
INFO
Use kCursor B / C to select “Connect” and
press kENTER. J2
“Not found” is displayed when there is an error
connecting. Check that the following conditions have
been satisfied, and try to establish a wireless
connection again.
• Both this unit and the Bluetooth component are paired.
• The Bluetooth component is switched on.
• The Bluetooth component is within 32 ft. (10 m) of the
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
4
Operate the Bluetooth component for
playback.
To disconnect a wireless connection, repeat the same
steps, and in step 3, select “Disconnect.”
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
d DOCK
k Cursor B / C
k ENTER
t OPTION
J 1 : Depending on Bluetooth components, wireless connection is
carried out right after the pairing. In this case, “BT connected” is
displayed instead of “Completed.”
J 2 : “Disconnect” is displayed when a Bluetooth component has been
connected.
En
84
PLAYBACK
Changing the friendly name of this unit by using the web browser
You can change the friendly name of this unit by using the graphical user interface that appears on the web browser.
Friendly name is the identification name informed to external components in the same network. For example, the icon indicating this unit may be easily recognized by the original friendly name when
the sharing media function of Windows Media Player is used (☞p. 67).
Check the IP address of this unit by using “IP Address” in “Network” menu (☞p. 108) in advance, and then enter the IP address to the web browser to access this unit to change the friendly name.
NOTE
When “Network Standby” is set to “On” in the Network menu,
the graphical user interface can be displayed on the web browser
even if this unit was in standby mode (☞p. 108). When
“Network Standby” is set to “Off,” we recommend that
“Network Standby” is set to “On.”
PC
Web browser
Access
• To use this feature, this unit and your PC must be connected
properly in the network. Refer to “Connecting to the network” for
details on the connections (☞p. 32).
• We recommend that you use Windows Internet Explorer 8 that is
installed on Windows XP or Windows 7 PC to access this unit.
• You can register the MAC address of the PCs you want to use to
control this unit and limit the PCs that can control this unit by
using the web browser. You can select that this unit allows the
access to this unit by the PCs whose MAC addresses are
registered to this unit or allows the access by any PCs by using
“MAC Address Filter” in the “Network” setup (☞p. 108).
When your PC successfully accesses this unit, the following screen
is displayed on the web browser.
a
b
a Friendly Name
Enter your favorite friendly name in the box.
b APPLY
Applies the friendly name entered to this unit.
Changing the friendly name of this unit
E.g.,
[RX-V867] (default) → [YAMAHA AV Amplifier]
En
85
SETUP
MAIN
ZONE 2
CODE SET
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
Settings, such as the name of an input source or the icon displayed for an input source can be changed from the Input menu.
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
AV
Configuring input sources
HDMI OUT
TUNER
SIRIUS
The name of an input source and its icon, as well as other
input source settings, can be changed from the Input
menu displayed on the TV screen.
NET
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
TUN./CH
3
Use kCursor D / E to select an input source
to be configured and press kCursor B.
4
Use kCursor B / C to select an item and
press kENTER.
6
Press jON SCREEN to close the menu.
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
1
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
j
VOLUME
k
Press jON SCREEN.
OPTION
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
2
Use kCursor B / C to select “Input” and
press kENTER.
INPUT
MUTE
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
If the selected item contains additional items, use
kCursor B / C to select the desired item and press
kENTER.
5
Use kCursor B / C to adjust the setting.
Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu
screen. Repeat steps 4 to 5 to adjust multiple settings.
En
86
SETUP
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
Input menu
The following items are provided for each input source. “✓” indicates the available menu for each input source.
HDMI 1-5
AV1-2
AV3-4
AV5-6
V-AUX
AUDIO1-2
Rename/Icon Select
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Audio In
✓
✓
Decoder Mode
✓
✓
✓
Enhancer
✓
✓
✓
TUNER
SIRIUS
Rhapsody
SIRIUS IR
NET
RADIO
DOCK
(iPod)
DOCK
MULTI CH
(Bluetooth)
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
DMC Control
Account Status
✓
✓
Sign In
✓
✓
Rhapsody Trial
✓
Remove Account
✓
SIRIUS IR Trial
PC
✓
✓
Standby Charge
✓
iPod Interlock
✓ J1
✓
Video Out
J 1 : Not available when playing back iPod/iPhone with wired connection.
En
87
SETUP
MAIN
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Changing an input source name or
SOURCE RECEIVER
icon
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
Rename/Icon Select
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
NET
Changes the input source name (up to nine characters)
and icon displayed on the front panel display or TV
screen.
HDMI OUT
TUNER
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
TUN./CH
1
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
Use kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Rename/Icon Select” and press kENTER.
7
Press kCursor C to select “OK” and press
kENTER to register the new input name.
• To cancel the operation without applying changes,
select “CANCEL” and then press kENTER.
• To clear the characters entered in step 5, select
“CLEAR” and press kENTER.
■ Combining HDMI/AV1-2 input
source video and audio
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
■ Setting the format of digital audio
signals
Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio to playback to DTS. For
example, if the format is not automatically detected
correctly even during playback of DTS format audio,
this item can be used to set the playback format to
DTS. J1
Auto (Default)
The audio format is automatically
selected to match the format of the input
audio.
DTS
Selects DTS signals only. Other input
signals are not reproduced.
Audio In
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
Combines video from HDMI or AV input sources with
analog/digital audio inputs in situations such as:
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
– an playback device is connected with an HDMI cable
but cannot transmit audio through HDMI
– an playback device with component video output and
analog audio output (such as certain game consoles)
are connected to the system
k
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
2
3
Use kCursor D / E to choose an icon.
Press kCursor C and kENTER.
Editing the name is available.
MUTE
4
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
5
6
Press kCursor B / C to select a character,
and press kCursor D / E to enter the
selected character.
Repeat step 4 to enter the desired input
source name.
Confirm the input source name by pressing
kENTER.
To change assignments, select an input source (HDMI1-5
or AV1-2) as the video input first, and then select audio
input jacks in this menu.
Set as follows according on the desired combination of
audio input jacks.
Audio inputs
Settings method
Optical digital audio
input
Select AV1 or AV4. Connect the external
component audio cable to the optical digital
jack for the selected input.
Coaxial digital audio
input
Select AV2 or AV3. Connect the external
component audio cable to the coaxial digital
jack for the selected input.
Analog audio input
Select one of AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or
AUDIO2. Connect the external
component audio cable to the audio jack
for the selected input.
■ Using a PC to control this unit over
a network
DMC Control
This unit can be operated via the DLNA compatible
controller (e.g., Windows Media Player, etc.) to the same
network of this unit.
DMC stands for “Digital Media Controller.”
Disable
Disables the DMC control function.
Enable (Default)
Enables the DMC control function.
J 1 : AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when “Audio Return
Channel” is on, and the input source is used for “TV Audio
Input.”
En
88
SETUP
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
■ Confirming the account of the Rhapsody
service or SIRIUS Internet Radio
■ Selecting the sound program suitable for
listening to compressed audio, such as
MP3
■ Setting the interlock functions with iPod/
iPhone (when a Yamaha Wireless System
for iPod is connected)
Account Status
Displays the current account status of Rhapsody service or SIRIUS
Internet Radio.
■ Sign in to your account for the Rhapsody
service or SIRIUS Internet Radio
Sign In
Sign in to your account for the Rhapsody service or SIRIUS
Internet Radio (☞p. 71, p. 75).
Enhancer
iPod Interlock
Turns on/off the Compressed Music Enhancer.
Off (Default)
Turns off the Compressed Music Enhancer.
On
Turns on the Compressed Music Enhancer.
This unit can be automatically operated in conjunction with
operations on iPod when the receiver of the Wireless System for
iPod is connected to this unit.
Power & Input
Starting playback of iPod/iPhone turns on this unit
and switches the input source to DOCK (iPod)
automatically when this item is set to “On.” This unit
automatically enters standby mode when iPod/iPhone
is not operated for a while after playback is stopped.
This interlock function is disable with “Off.”
Volume
Adjusting the volume on the iPod/iPhone also adjusts
the volume of this unit when this item is set to “On.”
This interlock function is disable with “Off.”
■ Charging an iPod™/iPhone™ in standby
mode
Standby Charge
Rhapsody Trial
Displays the URL for free 30-day trial service content. Create an
account in the specified website, sign in to your account with “Sign
In” to get started with a free trial.
Charges an iPod/iPhone stationed in the Universal Dock for iPod /
iPhone or receiver of the Wireless System for iPod while the
receiver is in standby mode.
Auto (Default)
SIRIUS IR Trial
Creates a temporary account for free 30-day trial and sign in to the
account automatically.
Refer to “Rhapsody® account sign-in” (☞p. 71) or “SIRIUS
Internet Radio account sign-in” (☞p. 75) for details on signing
in to your account.
■ Removing your account from the
Rhapsody service or SIRIUS Internet
Radio
Off
This unit charges iPod/iPhone when this unit is in
standby mode. While charging an iPod/iPhone, the
HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator lights. When
HDMI Through function is off, the indicator goes out
after the charging is complete.
■ Outputting a video signal input from
another input source while playing a
multi-channel audio signal
Video Out
This unit does not charge iPod/iPhone.
When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, a video signal
input from another terminal can be output to the video monitor. For
example, even if an audio and video component such as a DVD
player that does not support a multi-channel digital audio output,
the video signal can be output to the video monitor while
reproducing a multi-channel analog audio signal.
Remove Account
Removes an account registered with the Rhapsody service or
SIRIUS Internet Radio.
En
89
SETUP
MAIN
ZONE 2
Editing the SCENE function (SCENE menu)
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
The SCENE function (☞p. 44) can be edited from the SCENE menu displayed on the TV screen.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
Editing a scene
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
Various settings, such as the name of a scene or the icon
displayed for a scene, can be changed from the SCENE
menu.
HDMI OUT
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
BD
DVD
TV
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
1
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
3
Use kCursor D / E to select a scene to be
edited and press kCursor B.
5
Use kCursor B / C / D / E to adjust the
setting.
Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu
screen. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust multiple
settings.
Press jON SCREEN.
SCENE
CD
RADIO
j
6
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
k
4
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
Press jON SCREEN to close the menu.
Use kCursor B / C to select an item and
press kENTER.
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
2
Use kCursor B / C to select “Scene” and
press kENTER.
INPUT
MUTE
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
When the Utility is available in the selected item, use
kCursor B / C to select the Utility and press
kENTER.
En
90
SETUP
Editing the SCENE function (SCENE menu)
SCENE menu
■ Registering SCENE function settings
Save
SCENE1
Save
Load
Rename/Icon Select
Reset
Registers the settings currently applied to this unit for each
SCENE.
■ Adjusting settings registered with the
SCENE function
SCENE2
Save
Load
Rename/Icon Select
Reset
SCENE3
Save
Load
Rename/Icon Select
Reset
SCENE4
Save
Load
Rename/Icon Select
Reset
Load
Loads input sources or sound programs that have been registered
with the SCENE function, or specifies whether or not an external
component registered as the input source is automatically turned on
when a scene is selected.
Ok
Loads items indicated with a check mark in “Setting.”
Cancel
Cancels settings applied with “Setting.”
DETAIL
Specifies “SCENE IR” function and displays settings
registered with the SCENE function in detail.
Foe more information, see “SCENE IR” and “Detail”
at right.
SCENE IR
Specify whether or not a Yamaha BD/DVD player or CD player
connected to this unit turns on automatically.
Off
Disables the SCENE IR function.
Yamaha BD/DVD
Player1
Select this when a Yamaha BD/DVD player is
connected to this unit.
Yamaha BD/DVD
Player2
Select this if the player dose not turn on when
“Yamaha BD/DVD Player1” is selected.
Yamaha CD Player
Select this when a Yamaha CD player is connected to
this unit.
Detail
Display details of settings registered with the SCENE function.
Items indicated with a check mark in “Setting” are loaded.
Input
Displays “Input” and “Audio Select” settings
registered with the SCENE function.
Mode
Displays the sound program registered with the
SCENE function.
Enhancer
Displays the “Enhancer” setting registered with the
SCENE function.
En
91
SETUP
MAIN
Editing the SCENE function (SCENE menu)
ZONE 2
CODE SET
■ Changing a scene name and icon
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
Rename/Icon Select
AUDIO
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front
panel display or TV screen.
AV
DOCK
HDMI OUT
1
2
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
Use kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Rename/Icon Select” and press kENTER.
Use kCursor D / E to choose an icon.
7
Press kCursor C to select “OK” and press
kENTER to register the new input name.
• To cancel the operation without applying changes,
select “CANCEL” and then press kENTER.
• To clear the characters entered in step 4, select
“CLEAR” and press kENTER.
■ Resetting a scene
Reset
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
Restores all settings for the selected scene to their
default values.
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
k
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
3
Press kCursor C and kENTER.
4
Press kCursor B / C to select a character,
and press kCursor D / E to enter the
selected character.
Editing the name is available.
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
Scene names may consist of up to 20 characters.
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
5
6
Repeat step 4 to enter the desired scene
name.
Confirm the scene name by pressing
kENTER.
En
92
SETUP
MAIN
ZONE 2
Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu)
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Sound effects can be adjusted from the Sound Program menu.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
Editing sound programs
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
Adjust sound field elements (sound program parameters)
to achieve sound effects suited to the acoustics of audio/
video sources or rooms if you are not satisfied with the
results achieved with default sound program settings.
Follow the procedure described below to adjust sound
program parameters.
HDMI OUT
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
3
Use kCursor D / E to select a sound
program and press kCursor B.
Sound programs
TV
CD
RADIO
j
VOLUME
k
OPTION
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
1
2
Press jON SCREEN.
MUTE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
Press jON SCREEN to close the Sound
Program menu.
■ To initialize sound program parameters
Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Sound Program” and press kENTER.
4
REC
Use kCursor D / E to adjust the parameter
and press kRETURN. J1
When there are multiple parameters in the selected
sound program, repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust other
parameters.
6
SCENE
BD
DVD
5
Use kCursor B / C to select a parameter
and press kENTER.
To set the parameters of the sound program back to
their default settings, use kCursor B / C repeatedly
to select “Reset” in step 4 and press kENTER.
When the following message is displayed, select
“OK” and press kENTER to initialize.
Sound program parameters
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
Choices
To cancel initializing, select “CANCEL” and press
kENTER when the message above is displayed.
J 1 : An asterisk (*) appears on the left of the sound field parameter
name displayed on the TV when you change the parameter from
its default setting.
En
93
SETUP
Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu)
-6 dB to +3 dB
Default setting
0 dB
Adjust “DSP Level” as follows:
Surround Room Size
Surround Back Initial Delay
Surround Back Room Size
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field
initial delay. Changes the apparent size of the sound field by
adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection
heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the smaller the sound
field seems to the listener.
Adjustable range
1 to 99 ms (Initial Delay)
1 to 49 ms (Surround Initial Delay and Surround Back
Initial Delay)
• The effect sound is too soft.
• There are no differences between effects of the sound programs.
→ Increase the effect level.
• The sound is dull.
• The sound field effect is added too much.
→ Reduce the effect level.
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size.
Adjusts the apparent size of the sound field. The larger the value,
the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is
repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer
the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent
reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds,
you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing
this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the
room.
Adjustable range
Source sound
0.1 to 2.0
Level
Level
Early
reflections
Time
Delay
Source sound
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Audio source
Time
Time
Time
Audio source
Reflection face
Small value = 1 ms
Early
reflections
Level
Adjustable range
Surround Initial Delay
Level
Change the effect level (level of the sound field effect to be added).
You can adjust the level of the sound field effect while checking the
sound effect.
Room Size
Level
DSP Level
Initial Delay
Level
CINEMA DSP parameters
Large value = 99 ms
When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also
recommend that you adjust the corresponding room size
parameters likewise.
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend
that you adjust the corresponding initial delay parameters
likewise.
En
94
SETUP
Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu)
Reverb Time
Surround Liveness
Surround Back Liveness
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the
reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at
which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of an audio
source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent
wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A
room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead,”
while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live.”
This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and
thus the “liveness” of the room.
Reverb Delay
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the
dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz.
This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an
extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time to get more
sustaining reverberation sound, and set a shorter time to get
articulate sound.
Adjustable range
Adjustable range
Reverberation
Source sound
60 dB
Source sound
(dB)
60 dB
60 dB
Reverberation
Short
reverberation
Source sound
Reverberation
Early reflections
Rev. Time
0 to 10
0 to 250 ms
1.0 to 5.0 s
Time
Adjustable range
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the
beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the
reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the
reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you
feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Level
Liveness
Time
Rev. Time
Time
Time
Rev. Time
Long
reverberation
Rev. Delay
Audio source
Time
Small reflected
sound
Small value = 0
Level
Dead
Level
Level
Live
Time
Small value = 1.0 s
Large value = 5.0 s
Time
Large reflected
sound
Large value = 10
En
95
SETUP
Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu)
Reverb Level
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation
sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation
becomes.
2ch Stereo only
Direct
0 to 100%
Level
Adjustable range
Parameters usable in certain sound
programs
Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control circuit
depending on the condition of tone control etc., when an analog
audio source is played back. You can enjoy a higher quality sound.
Source sound
Auto (Default)
Rev. Level
Off
Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and tone
control circuit when both tone controls of “Bass” and
“Treble” are set to 0 dB.
Surround R Level
Adjusts the volume of the surround R channel. J2
Adjustable range
0 to 100%
Default setting
100%
Surround Back L Level
Adjusts the volume of the surround back L channel. J2
Adjustable range
0 to 100%
Default setting
35% (7.1-channel configuration)
50% (6.1-channel configuration)
Does not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control
circuit.
Time
Surround Back R Level
7ch Stereo only
Decode Type
Adjusts the volume of the surround back R channel. J2
Selects a surround decoder to be used with a sound program in the
MOVIE category. J1
PLIIx Movie
PLII Movie
Selects the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (or
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) decoder.
Neo:6 Cinema
Selects the Neo:6 (Cinema) decoder.
Center Level
Adjusts the center channel volume. J2
Adjustable range
0 to 100%
Default setting
100%
Adjustable range
0 to 100%
Default setting
35% (7.1-channel configuration)
50% (6.1-channel configuration)
Front Presence L Level
Surround L Level
Adjusts the volume of the front presence L channel. J2
Adjusts the volume of the surround L channel. J2
J 1 : Surround decoders cannot be changed when used with the following MOVIE
Adjustable range
0 to 100%
Default setting
100%
Adjustable range
0 to 100%
Default setting
33%
J 2 : Not displayed when speakers are set to be inactive.
sound programs.
• Mono Movie
• Sports
• Action Game
• Roleplaying Game
En
96
SETUP
Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu)
Front Presence R Level
Parameters usable in surround decoder
Adjusts the volume of the front presence R channel. J1
Decode Type
Adjustable range
0 to 100%
Default setting
33%
Selects a surround decoder.
Pro Logic
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic
decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of audio sources.
PLIIx Movie /
PLII Movie
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or
Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for
movies. J2
PLIIx Music /
PLII Music
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or
Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for
music. J2
PLIIx Game /
PLII Game
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or
Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for
games. J2
Neo:6 Cinema
Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This
is suitable for movies.
Neo:6 Music
Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This
is suitable for music.
Center Width
Spreads the center channel sound to the front left and right
speakers to suit your needs or preferences. Set this parameter to 0
for outputting the center sound from the center speaker only, or to 7
for outputting it from the front left/right speaker only.
Adjustable range
0 to 7
Default setting
3
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound field and
the surround sound field. You can adjust the difference in level
created by the software being played back to obtain the preferred
sound balance.
The surround sound gets stronger as you make the value more
negative, and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value
more positive.
Adjustable range
-3 to +3
Default setting
0
Dolby PLIIx Music and Dolby PLII Music only
When Neo:6 Music is selected
Panorama
Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends front left/
right channels sounds to the surround speakers as well as the front
speakers for a wraparound effect.
Off (Default)
Disables the effect.
On
Enables the effect.
Center Image
Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center
channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as
necessary.
Adjustable range
0.0 to 1.0
Default setting
0.3
J 1 : Not displayed when speakers are set to be inactive.
J 2 : You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder in the following conditions:
• When “Surround Back” is set to “None” (☞p. 100).
• When headphones are connected.
En
97
SETUP
MAIN
ZONE 2
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Various settings, such as speaker volume or HDMI functions, can be changed from the Setup menu.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
Operating the Setup menu
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
NET
Setup menu setting
Speaker
Adjusts parameters for speakers, such as
speaker status, and volume adjustment for
each speaker (☞p. 99).
Sound
Sets functions related to audio output,
such as adjustment of maximum volume
and of dynamic range (☞p. 103).
Video
Sets video output functions, such as video
conversion settings (resolution and aspect
ratio) (☞p. 104).
HDMI
Sets HDMI functions, such as the HDMI
Control function and output destination
for HDMI sound (☞p. 105).
HDMI OUT
TUNER
1
2
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
BD
DVD
TV
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
Press jON SCREEN.
Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Setup” and press kENTER.
SCENE
CD
RADIO
j
VOLUME
k
OPTION
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
Network
Sets network status, such as IP Address or
MAC Address Filter (☞p. 108).
Multi Zone
Sets multi-zone functions, such as
volume adjustment for speakers in the
secondary zone (☞p. 109).
4
Use kCursor B / C to select an item and
press kENTER.
When the selected item contains detailed ones, use
kCursor B / C to select the detailed item and press
kENTER.
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
3
Use kCursor D / E to select a menu and
press kENTER.
Function
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
Language
Sets functions such as the Auto Power
Down function, that make the unit easier
to use (☞p. 109).
Selects the language of the menus and
messages displayed on TV screen
(☞p. 112).
5
Use kCursor B / C / D / E to adjust the
setting.
Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu
screen. Repeat steps 4 to 5 to adjust multiple settings.
6
Press jON SCREEN to close the menu.
En
98
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Setup menu
Manages settings for speakers
■ Manual speaker setup
Manual Setup
The following parameters can be specified manually.
Speaker
Auto Setup
Manual Setup
Sound
Lipsync
Dynamic Range
Max Volume
Initial Volume
Adaptive DSP Level
Speaker Setup items
Video
Analog to Analog Conversion
Processing
Auto Setup
Optimizes the speaker configuration automatically.
Manual Setup
Manually adjusts parameters for speakers.
HDMI
HDMI Control
Control Select
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
TV Audio Input
Audio Output
Standby Through
Network
IP Address
Network Standby
MAC Address Filter
Power Amp Assign
Adds the extra speakers to the 7.1-channel speaker
connection.
Configuration
Manually manages speaker configuration, such as
speaker size (sound production capacity), and bass
audio processing.
Distance
Manually adjusts the output of each speaker based on
distance to the listening position.
Level
Manually adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Parametric EQ
Selects an equalizer to adjust speaker output
characteristics.
Test Tone
Generates test tones.
■ Automatic speaker setup
Auto Setup
Optimizes the speaker configuration automatically using YPAO
(☞p. 34).
Power Amp Assign
In addition to the 7.1-channel speaker connection, various speaker
configurations are possible using the presence speakers connection,
bi-amp connection or Zone2 function (☞p. 17, p. 18).
7ch Normal
Enables the normal 7-channel speakers and front
presence speakers (☞p. 14).
7ch + 1ZONE
Enables the normal 7-channel speakers and zone2
speakers (☞p. 16).
5ch BI-AMP
Enables the bi-amp connection (☞p. 16).
Multi Zone
Zone2 Set
Party Mode Set
Zone Rename
Function
Auto Power Down
Display Set
Trigger Output
Memory Guard
Language
En
99
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Configuration
Adjusts the output characteristics of the speakers based on
manually set parameters.
In the “Configuration,” you can select the speaker size
characteristic (Large or Small). Select the size (sound
reproduction capacity) that matches your speakers.
Front
Selects the size (sound reproduction capacity) of the front
speakers. J1
Large
Small (Default)
Select this for large speakers. The front speakers will
produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Select this for small speakers. The subwoofer will
produce front channel low-frequency
components. J2
Center
Selects the size of the center speakers.
Woofer diameter
• 6-1/4 in (16 cm) or larger → Large
• 6-1/4 in (16 cm) or smaller → Small
When speaker size is set to “Small,” low-frequency components
of the speakers that you configured are produced from the
subwoofer (or from the front speakers if there is no subwoofer).
Large
Select this when a large center speaker is connected.
Small (Default)
Select this when a small center speaker is connected.
None
Select this when there is no center speaker. The front
speakers will produce center channel audio.
Surround
Selects the size of the surround speakers.
Large
Select this when the surround speakers are large.
Small (Default)
Select this when the surround speakers are small.
None
Select this when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel
audio signals.
• When set to “None,” no sound is produced from the surround
back speaker even if that speaker is connected.
• When set to “None,” the sound programs will change to Virtual
CINEMA DSP mode.
Surround Back
Selects the size of the surround back speakers.
Largex1
Select when one large surround back speaker is
connected.
Largex2
Select when two large surround back speakers are
connected.
Smallx1
Select when one small surround back speaker is
connected.
Smallx2 (Default)
Select when two small surround back speakers are
connected.
None
Select this when no surround back speakers are
connected.
• When there are no surround speakers are connected, the setting
will automatically change to “None.”
• You can set surround back audio signals, including from the
playback source, to be mixed down and produced from a single
speaker (6.1-channel layout) or produced from left and right
surround speakers (5.1-channel layout).
Front Presence
Specify connection of front presence speakers.
Use (Default)
Select this when front presence speakers are
connected.
None
Select this when front presence speakers are not
connected.
J 1 : When “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” you can only choose “Large.” If the front
speaker setting is “Small” and you change “Subwoofer” to “None,” it will
automatically change to “Large.”
J 2 : You can set the low-frequency components of audio signals transmitted from
the front speakers to the subwoofer by using “Bass Cross Over.”
En
100
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Subwoofer
Confirms the subwoofer.
Use (Default)
Select this when subwoofer is connected. During
playback, the subwoofer will produce audio from the
LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass audio
from other channels. J1
None
Select this when subwoofer is not connected. The
front speakers will produce audio from the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel and bass frequency audio
from other channels.
Phase
Sets the phase of the subwoofer if the bass audio is lacking or
unclear.
Normal (Default)
Does not change the subwoofer phase.
Reverse
Reverses the subwoofer phase.
Extra Bass
Allows the front channel low-frequency components to be
produced exclusively by the subwoofer, or by both the subwoofer
and the front speakers.
Bass Cross Over
Sets the lower limit of low-frequency component which is
produced from speakers of which the size is set to “Small.”
A frequency sound which is lower than the specified frequency will
be produced from the subwoofer or the front speakers. J2
Level
Separately adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Use kCursor B / C to select the desired speaker, and press
kENTER. Then use kCursor D / E to adjust the volume for the
selected speaker.
40Hz
110Hz
60Hz
120Hz
Adjustable range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
80Hz (Default)
160Hz
Default setting
0.0 dB
90Hz
200Hz
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB
100Hz
Distance
Adjusts the timing at which the speakers produce audio so that
sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same
time.
Selecting adjustment units
Use kCursor B / C to select the unit for distance (meters or
feet), and press kENTER.
Setting distances for each speaker
Off (Default)
Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the
front speakers or the subwoofer produce the front
channel low-frequency components.
On
The subwoofer and the front speakers produce the
front channel low-frequency components.
When “Subwoofer” is set to “None” or “Front” is set to “Small,”
“Extra Bass” is disabled.
Use kCursor B / C to select the speaker you want to configure,
and press kENTER. Then use kCursor D / E to set the distance
from the speaker to your listening position.
Adjustable range
1.0 ft to 80.0 ft (0.30 m to 24.0 m)
Default setting
10.0 ft (3.00 m)
Adjustment
increments
0.2 ft (0.05 m)
J 1 : Enabling “Extra Bass” allows both the subwoofer and the front speakers to
produce bass audio.
J 2 : If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set
the crossover frequency to maximum and the volume to half (or slightly less).
En
101
SETUP
MAIN
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Parametric EQ
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
Adjusts sound quality of tone using a parametric
equalizer.
AUDIO
AV
1
2
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
PEQ Select
Select an equalizer type.
DOCK
HDMI OUT
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
BD
DVD
TV
PRESET
TUN./CH
Manual
Manually adjust equalizer sound.
Flat
Adjust individual speakers to achieve the
same characteristics. Select this option if
speakers offer the same quality.
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
j
SCENE
CD
RADIO
Front
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
k
Adjust individual speakers to achieve the
same characteristics as the front left and
right speakers. Select this option if front
left and right speakers offer significantly
greater quality than other speakers.
DISPLAY
Natural
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
Through (Default)
Disable the equalizer.
PEQ Data Copy
Select 1 of the 3 parametric equalizer types acquired with
automatic setup and manually copy that information to the
manual adjustments.
Flat > Manual
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
Adjust all speakers to achieve a natural
sound. Select this if high-frequency
sounds seem too strong when “PEQ
Select” is set to “Flat.”
Copy the “Flat” parametric equalizer
information acquired with automatic
setup.
Front > Manual
Copy the “Front” parametric equalizer
information acquired with automatic
setup.
Natural > Manual
Copy the “Natural” parametric equalizer
information acquired with automatic
setup.
Front L / Front R / Center / Surround L / Surround R /
Surround Back L / Surround Back R / Front Presence L /
Front Presence R
The parametric equalizer can be used to manually adjust
sound quality for individual speakers.
Set “PEQ Select” to “Manual” and use “PEQ Data
Copy” to copy information acquired with automatic
setup. This information can be used as a basis for
performing manual adjustments.
1
Use kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Band / Gain,” “Freq. / Gain,” or “Q / Gain”
and press kENTER.
2
Use kCursor D / E repeatedly to adjust the
parameter and use kCursor B / C
repeatedly to adjust the gain.
3
4
Press kENTER to exit the edit window.
Test Tone
Turns the test tone generator on or off.
Off (Default)
Does not generate test tones.
On
Generates test tones. While “On” is
selected, test tones are produced
constantly.
You can use the test tone in a variety of
circumstances. For example, you can adjust the
volume balance settings for each speaker, or whenever
you adjust the settings on the internal parametric
equalizer, you can listen to the actual effect while
operating this unit. Turn the test tone off when you
have finished making adjustments.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to configure other
parameters.
To reset all parameter settings for the selected
speaker, select “Reset to Flat” and press kENTER.
5
Press jON SCREEN to close the menu.
En
102
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Setting the audio output function of this
unit
■ Synchronizing audio/video output
Mode
Selects a compensation method for the delay between audio and
video output.
Auto (Default) J1
Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for
Dolby Digital and DTS playback.
Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume for this receiver.
Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned
on.
Adaptive DSP Level
Adjusts the level of DSP effect in conjunction with the
volume level.
dynamic range
Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between audio and video output (Lipsync
function).
Sound Setup items
■ Auto-adjusting Dolby Digital and DTS
Manual
When connecting to a TV via HDMI, automatically
adjusts output timing if the TV supports an automatic
lipsync function.
Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for audio bitstream
(Dolby Digital and DTS) signal playback.
MAX (Default)
Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
STD
Adjusts the dynamic range for optimum volume for
regular home use.
MIN/AUTO
(MIN) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low
volume or a quiet environment, such as at night, for
bitstream signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals.
(AUTO) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby
TrueHD signals based on input signal information.
Manually adjusts the correction time. Select this when
the monitor does not support the automatic lipsync
function.
■ Setting the maximum volume
Delay
Adjustable range
0 ms to +250 ms
Default setting
0 ms
Adjustment
increments
1 ms
Max Volume
Specify the maximum volume level so that sound is not too loud.
The default setting of +16.5 dB produces the highest volume.
Adjustable range
-30.0 dB to +16.5 dB (maximum volume)
Default setting
+16.5 dB
Adjustment
increments
5.0 dB
J 1 : This setting is effective at the HDMI OUT jack selected by using
rHDMI OUT.
En
103
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■ Setting the startup volume
Setting this unit’s video output function
Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. When
this parameter is set to “Off,” the volume is set at the level when the
receiver last entered standby mode. J1
Adjustable range
Off, Mute, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Default setting
Off
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB
Video Setup items
■ Adjusting DSP effect and volume level
Adaptive DSP Level
Automatically adjust the level of DSP effect in conjunction with
the volume level.
Off
Disables automatic adjustment of the level of DSP
effect.
On (Default)
Adjusts the degree of DSP effect in conjunction with
volume level. The higher the volume level, the less the
DSP effect applied. The lower the volume level, the
greater the DSP effect applied.
Analog to Analog
Conversion
Enable or disable video conversion between analog
video jacks.
Processing
Enable or disable adjustment of resolution and aspect
ratio for video signal converted to HDMI video.
• Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is always possible unless
video signals are being input at the HDMI input jacks or 1080presolution analog video signals are being input (☞p. 136).
• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line
video signals interchangeably.
• 480p-, 576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution video signals can not
be output at the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack (☞p. 136).
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks.
• When composite video signals from a VCR are converted into
component video signals, the picture quality may suffer
depending on your VCR.
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video jacks cannot
be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set
“Analog to Analog Conversion” to “Off.”
■ Analog-to-analog video conversion
Analog to Analog Conversion
Enables or disables video conversion between analog video jacks.
Off
Disables video conversion between analog video
jacks.
On (Default)
Enables video conversion between analog video jacks.
J 1 : When you set “Max Volume” at a lower level than “Initial Volume,” “Max
Volume” has priority.
En
104
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■ Adjusting resolution and aspect ratio with
conversion of video signal to HDMI
Through (Default)
The aspect ratio of HDMI video signal sources is not
adjusted.
16:9 Normal
Transmits 4:3 aspect ratio video signals to a 16:9 TV
with black bands on either side of the screen.
Processing
Adjust resolution and aspect ratio with conversion of video input to
HDMI video (upscaling).
Off (Default)
Resolution and aspect ratio are not adjusted with
processing.
On
Resolution and aspect ratio are adjusted with
processing.
Setting HDMI functions
Aspect
• The Aspect setting is automatically disabled when “Resolution”
is set to “Through.”
• The Aspect setting is automatically disabled for video input with
aspect ratios other than 4:3.
• Changing the aspect ratio of 720p, 1080i, or 1080p has no effect.
HDMI Setup items
Resolution
Auto (Default)
Automatic upscaling in accordance with TV
resolution.
480p
Upscaling to 480p (576p).
720p
Upscaling to 720p.
1080i
Upscaling to 1080i.
1080p
Upscaling to 1080p.
Through
No upscaling.
• The 720p-, 1080i- and 1080p-resolution video signals cannot be
upscaled (☞p. 136).
• When a TV is connected to this unit via the HDMI jack, this unit
automatically detects a resolution that the TV supports. Only the
detected resolution can be selected.
• If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the TV supports, set
“MON.CHK” in the Advanced Setup menu to “SKIP” (☞p. 120)
and try again.
HDMI Control
Turns the HDMI Control on or off.
Control Select
Choose an HDMI OUT jack on which HDMI
Control function is enabled.
ARC (Audio Return
Channel)
Turns the Audio Return Channel function on or
off.
TV Audio Input
Chooses automatically selected audio input in
conjunction with TV operation when the
HDMI Control is turned on.
Audio Output
Specifies whether or not audio signal is output
through this unit and a TV connected via the
HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks.
Standby Through J1
Turns the Standby Through function on or off.
J 1 : This item appears depending on “HDMI Control.”
En
105
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■ Receiver operation via TV (HDMI Control)
■ Listening to TV audio via single HDMI
cable (Audio Return Channel)
■ Selecting an input source to assign audio
input for the TV
HDMI Control
Set the HDMI Control function to “On” to operate devices
connected via HDMI. If the TV or other external components
support HDMI Control (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link), you can use
the remote controls of those devices to operate some of this unit’s
functions, and to synchronize this unit with the operation of those
devices.
Refer to “Using the HDMI Control function” (☞p. 121) for setting
instructions.
Off (Default)
Sets HDMI Control to “Off.”
On
Sets HDMI Control to “On.” J1
If this unit is connected to HDMI devices that do not support the
HDMI Control function, these functions will not operate.
■ Selecting an HDMI OUT jack for the HDMI
Control function
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
You can enable or disable the Audio Return Channel function.
When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and
the function is enabled, the TV’s audio output is transmit to this
unit via an HDMI cable.
The TV audio input to this unit is regarded as the input source
selected in “TV Audio Input.” J2
By means of this function, you do not need to connect the TV’s
audio output (digital audio output or analog audio output) to the
unit.
Off (Default)
Sets the Audio Return Channel to “Off.”
On
Sets the Audio Return Channel to “On.”
TV
Select the HDMI OUT jack that utilizes the HDMI Control
function.
Refer to “Using the HDMI Control function” (☞p. 121) for setting
instructions.
OUT1(TV1)
Applies the HDMI Control function for the HDMI
OUT 1 jack.
OUT2(TV2)
Applies the HDMI Control function for the HDMI
OUT 2 jack.
J 1 : When the HDMI Control is “On,” the Standby Through function is
automatically enabled. When this unit enters standby mode, the audio and
video signals from the last-selected HDMI input source will continue to be
transmitted to the TV. The HDMI input source can only be changed using the
remote control.
VOL.
L
SL
SBL
Select the input source that receives audio signals from TV while
the HDMI Control function is on.
When the TV is set to output sounds via this unit, the TV audio
input is automatically selected to the input source assigned
here. J2
TV1
Audio input
AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2
Default setting
AV4
TV2
When the TV audio is input to the unit using Audio Return
Channel, “TV” is displayed on the front panel display.
AV4
Control Select
TV Audio Input
SW
C
R
SR
SBR
Audio input
AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2
Default setting
AV1
• “TV Audio Input” is enabled only for the HDMI OUT 1 or 2 jack
selected with “Control Select.”
• Refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically
when listening to TV audio” (☞p. 122) for instructions.
• “ARC (Audio Return Channel)” is enabled only for the HDMI
OUT 1 or 2 jack selected with “Control Select.”
• Refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio
Return Channel function” (☞p. 123) for setting instructions.
J 2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected for the input
source cannot be used.
En
106
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■ Specify whether or not audio signal is
output through this unit and a TV
Audio Output
OUT2
Specify whether or not audio signal is output through a TV
connected via the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
Off (Default)
Choose whether audio is played back through this unit or through a
TV.
Amp
Specify whether or not audio signal is output through this unit.
Off
Audio is not output through this unit.
On (Default)
Audio is output through this unit. When this setting is
selected, audio from the external component is output
in a format compatible with this unit.
OUT1
Specify whether or not audio signal is output through a TV
connected via the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
Off (Default)
Audio is not output through a TV connected via the
HDMI OUT 1 jack.
On
Outputs audio through a TV connected via the HDMI
OUT 1 jack. When this setting is selected, audio from
the external component is output in a format
compatible with the TV.
On
■ Transmitting HDMI audio/video to the TV
during standby mode (Standby Through)
Standby Through
Audio is not output through a TV connected via the
HDMI OUT 2 jack.
Outputs audio through a TV connected via the HDMI
OUT 2 jack. When this setting is selected, audio from
the external component is output in a format
compatible with the TV.
When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” the settings of “Amp”
and the output jack (OUT1 or OUT2) selected with Control
Select are interlocked with HDMI Control.
This function allows audio/video signals from HDMI inputs to
continue to be transmitted to a TV when this unit is in standby
mode.
When the Standby Through function is “On,” audio/video signals
continue to be output to the TV from the last HDMI input source
before this unit enters standby mode. The HDMI input source can be
selected using dHDMI1-5 or dV-AUX in standby mode.
Off (Default)
Sets Standby Through to “Off.”
On
Transmits audio/video signals from the selected
HDMI input source to the TV.
• When “HDMI Control” is “On,” Standby Through function is
automatically enabled and “Standby Through” is not displayed.
• When the Standby Through function is on, the HDMI Through/
iPod Charge indicator on the front panel lights during the standby
mode. This unit consumes approximately 3 W of power.
En
107
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Adjusting this unit’s network parameters
■ Setting the network parameters (IP
address, etc.)
IP Address
DHCP
IP Address
Selects whether this unit acquires the network
parameters (IP address, etc.) from the network’s
DHCP server automatically, or whether these
parameters are specified manually.
Network Standby
Selects whether or not commands are accepted over
the network when this unit is in standby mode.
MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to restrict network access
to this unit.
the network when in the standby mode
Network Standby
Selects whether or not this unit automatically acquires network
parameters (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, primary
DNS server and secondary DNS server) from a network device
such as a router equipped with DHCP function.
Network setup items
■ Turning this unit on by the command over
Off
Select this setting to specify IP address manually.
On (Default)
Select this setting to acquire IP address from the
network’s DHCP server automatically.
Manual Setup
IP Address
Specifies the IP address assigned to this unit. An IP
address used by another device on the same network
may not be used.
Subnet Mask
Specifies the subnet mask assigned to this unit.
Default Gateway
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server
(Primary)/DNS
Server (Secondary)
Specifies the IP addresses of the primary and
secondary Domain Name System (DNS) servers.
If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in
“DNS Server (Primary).” If the network has two or more DNS
addresses, enter one of the addresses in “DNS Server (Primary)”
and another in “DNS Server (Secondary).”
Selects whether or not to turn this unit on by the command over the
network when in the standby mode.
Off (Default)
Disables to turn this unit on by the command over the
network.
On
Enables to turn this unit on by the command over the
network.
When “Network Standby” is set to “On,” this unit can be
accessed from PC over a network during the standby mode with
the power consumption of about only 5 W.
■ Setting the MAC Address Filter
MAC Address Filter
Sets MAC address filter to restrict access to this unit via LAN.
Mode
Off (Default)
Disables the MAC address filter function.
On
Permits access to this unit only from network devices
with the specified MAC addresses.
Address Setup
Specifies the MAC addresses of network devices permitted to
access to this unit when “MAC Address Filter” is set to “On.”
En
108
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Setting this unit’s multi-zone function
■ Setting the party mode
Party Mode Set
In party mode, the main zone sources can be played in Zone2
simultaneously (☞p. 126). Select “Zone2,” and then select
“Enable” or “Disable.”
Multi Zone Setup items
Zone2 Set
Adjusts Zone2 volume level.
Party Mode Set
Enable or disable the party mode function.
Zone Rename
Changes the name of each zone.
■ Adjusting Zone2 volume
Zone2 Set
Enable (Default)
Enables the party mode function.
Disable
Disables the party mode function.
■ Changing Zone name
Zone Rename
6
7
Confirm the zone name by pressing
kENTER.
Press kCursor C to select “OK” and press
kENTER to register the new zone name.
• To cancel the operation without applying changes,
select “CANCEL” and press kENTER.
• To clear the characters entered in step 4, select
“CLEAR” and press kENTER.
• Zone names may consist of up to 9 characters.
Making the receiver easier to use
Editing the name of the selected zone.
1
2
Use kCursor B / C repeatedly to select “Zone
Rename” and press kENTER.
Press kCursor B / C to select a zone you want to
rename and press kENTER.
Max Volume
Specify the maximum volume level in Zone2 so that sound is not
too loud.
Function Setup items
Adjustable range
-30.0 dB to +16.5 dB (maximum volume)
Default setting
+16.5 dB
Adjustment
increments
5.0 dB
Initial Volume
Specify the initial volume level in Zone2 when this unit is turned on.
Adjustable range
Off, Mute, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Default setting
Off
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB
Auto Power Down
This unit enters standby mode if no operations are
performed.
Display Set
Specifies menu items displayed on TV screen and the
front panel.
3
Press kENTER.
Trigger Output
Specifies TRIGGER OUT jack function.
Editing the name is available.
Memory Guard
Protects some settings against accidental
modification.
4
5
Press kCursor B / C to select a character and press
kCursor D / E to enter the selected character.
Repeat step 4 to enter the desired zone name.
En
109
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■ Goes enter standby mode automatically
when you leave it without operating
■ Specifying menu display
Display Set
Auto Power Down
If you do not operate this unit or use the remote control for an
extended period of time, it will automatically go into standby mode
(Auto Power Down function). This function’s default setting is
“Off.” When you want to enable this function, set the amount of
time to pass before this unit will enter standby.
4hours
Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated
this unit for four hours.
8hours
Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated
this unit for eight hours.
12hours
Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated
this unit for twelve hours.
Off (Default)
Auto Power Down function is disabled.
Wall Paper
Specify the wall paper displayed on the TV screen when no video
signal is input. Select one that you prefer.
Specify front panel display brightness and TV screen wall paper.
Picture 1-3
Front Panel Display
Specify front panel display brightness and message scroll pattern.
Displays an image on the TV screen when there is no
video signal.
Gray
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when
there is no video signal.
Dimmer
Adjustable range: -4 - 0
Reduce brightness of the front panel display. As the
value is lowered, the panel display darkens.
Scroll
Selects the manner in which display scrolls when the
total number of characters exceeds the display area on
the front panel display.
Select “Continue” for continuous scrolling of all
characters.
Select “Once” to scroll through all characters once
and then halt scrolling for display of only the first 14
characters.
This unit starts a countdown of 30 seconds before entering the
standby mode. Pressing any key of the remote control during the
countdown cancels entering the standby mode and reset the
timer.
En
110
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■ Setting TRIGGER OUT functions
Trigger Output
Sets the TRIGGER OUT jack to function synchronized with power
status of each zone or input switching.
Target Zone
Specify the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions
synchronized.
Main (Default)
Trigger Mode
Specify the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Power (Default)
Source
Manual
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized
with the power status of the zone specified with
“Target Zone.”
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized
with the input switching in the zone specified with
“Target Zone.”
Electronic signal is transmitted according to the
setting made in “Target Source.”
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic
signal transmission is synchronized with power status
of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic
signal transmission is synchronized with input
switching in the main zone.
Zone2
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic
signal transmission is synchronized with power status
of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic
signal transmission is synchronized with input
switching in Zone2.
All
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic
signal transmission is synchronized with power status
of the main zone or Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic
signal transmission is synchronized with input
switching in the main zone or Zone2.
Select this to manually switch the output level for
electronic signal transmission with “Manual.”
Manual
Manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission.
This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the
external component connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High (Default)
Transmits the electronic signal.
This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to
“Manual.”
Target Source
Specify the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with
each input switching.
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you
switch to the input source specified in this option.
High (Default)
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the
input source specified in this option.
This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to
“Source.”
En
111
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■ Prohibiting setting changes
Memory Guard
Prohibits setting changes to prevent careless changes being made
to the settings on Setup menu.
Off (Default)
Settings are not protected.
On
Prohibits changes to the settings on Setup menu until
it is returned to “Off.”
While set to “On,” the unit displays “Memory
Guard!” when an attempt is made to change the
settings.
Language
Select the language used for display of menus and messages. J1
Choices: English (English),
(Japanese),
(French),
(German),
(Spanish),
(Russian)
J 1 : Content window information is displayed in the language in which that
information was released.
En
112
SETUP
MAIN
ZONE 2
Confirming information of this unit (Information menu)
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
A variety of information for this unit can be displayed.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
Selecting information
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
NET
HDMI OUT
TUNER
1
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
TUN./CH
Press jON SCREEN.
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
TV
■ Video information
Displays information on the current audio signal.
Displays information on the current video signal.
Format
Signal format. When this unit is unable to
detect a digital signal, it automatically
switches to analog input.
HDMI signal
Source video signal type and video signal
output to this unit’s HDMI OUT 1-2
jacks.
Sampling
The number of samples taken per second
from a continuous signal to make a
discrete signal.
HDMI Resolution
Input signal (analog or HDMI) and output
signal (HDMI) resolution.
Analog Resolution
Channel
The number of source channels in the
input signal (front/surround/LFE). For
example, a multi-channel soundtrack with
3 front channels, 2 surround channels and
LFE is displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
Resolution of the source video signal and
the analog video signal output to this
unit’s COMPONENT MONITOR OUT
jacks.
HDMI Error
Error message for HDMI sources or
connected HDMI devices (☞p. 127).
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
■ Audio information
CD
RADIO
j
VOLUME
k
OPTION
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
2
Use kCursor B / C to select “Information”
and press kENTER.
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
3
Use kCursor D / E to select an Information
menu and press kENTER.
Bitrate
The number of bits passing a given point
per second.
Dialogue
The dialogue normalization level preset
to the current input bitstream signal.
• “---” is displayed when this unit cannot display the
corresponding information.
• Some high-definition audio bitstream contents may not
include the discrete surround back left and right
channel signals, but are encoded at a bitrate of 192
kHz.
• Even when direct bitstream output settings are applied,
some players convert the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby
Digital Plus bitstreams to the Dolby Digital bitstreams,
while converting DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio bitstreams to DTS bitstreams.
■ HDMI monitor
Displays information on the TV screen connected to this
unit’s HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks.
Interface
Displays information on the current
connection interface.
Video Resolution
Displays the frequency for each video
resolution of the TV currently connected.
En
113
SETUP
Confirming information of this unit (Information menu)
■ Network information
Displays information on the network status. Refer to “Adjusting
this unit’s network parameters” (☞p. 108) for details on setting the
network status.
IP Address /
Subnet Mask /
Default Gateway
Displays the status of the current IP address assigned
to this unit.
DNS Server (P) /
DNS Server (S)
Displays the IP address of the primary and secondary
DNS (Domain Name System) servers.
MAC Address
Displays the MAC address filter set to this unit.
Status
Displays the network status of this unit.
■ System information
Displays information on the current settings of the advanced setup.
Remote ID
Displays the Remote ID set to this unit.
TV Format
Displays the TV format set to this unit.
Speaker Impedance
Displays the speaker impedance set to this unit.
System ID
Displays the system ID of this unit.
Firmware Version
Displays the current version of the firmware installed
to this unit.
When detecting the latest firmware over a network:
– exclamation point appears on the Information menu icon
– message indicating that the latest firmware is released appears
in the System information
In this case, update the latest firmware by using “NETWORK”
of “FIRM UPDATE” in Advanced Setup menu.
■ Zone information
Displays information on the currently selected input and the
volume of Zone2.
En
114
SETUP
MAIN
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
c
p
You can operate an external component such as TV and DVD player with the remote control of this unit by setting the code for external component (remote control code).
The remote control code can be set for each input source. Individual setting allows you to switch external components seamlessly depending on the selected input source.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
5
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
AV
1
2
6
MULTI
SIRIUS
NET
5
Controlling other components with the remote control
d Selecting input source connected to DVD
player
DOCK
Selecting input source connected to CD
player
HDMI OUT
TUNER
Keys connecting external
components
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
TUN./CH
DVD player
DVD player
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
Playback/Stop
RADIO
Playback/Stop
OPTION
ON SCREEN
CD player
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
k
If you are unable to operate this unit after operating
an external component, light up
pSOURCE/RECEIVER in orange by pressing it,
and then try operating the remote control again.
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
l
REC
HOLD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
CD player
m
10
TV VOL
TV CH
cSOURCE A
Switches an external component on and off.
kCursor, kENTER, kRETURN
Operates the menus of external components.
lDISPLAY
Switches an external component display.
lExternal component operation keys
Functions as a recording or playback key of an external
component, or a menu display key.
mNumeric keys
Functions as numeric keys of an external component.
ENT
TV
INPUT
MUTE
The remote control keys for controlling external
components are available only when the external
components have corresponding control keys.
n
nTV control keys J1
c SOURCE A
d Input selector
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
k RETURN
l External component
nINPUT
Switches video inputs of TV.
nMUTE
Mutes TV volume temporarily.
nTV VOL +/-
Controls the volume of TV.
nTV CH +/-
Switches TV channels.
nA
Turns on and off TV.
operation keys
l DISPLAY
m Numeric keys
n TV control keys
n INPUT
n MUTE
n TV VOL +/n TV CH +/nA
p SOURCE/RECEIVER
J 1 : When remote control codes for external components are
registered with dInput selector or nA (nTV control
keys), the following operations are possible.
• When a TV remote control code is registered with dInput
selector, the kCursor, mNumeric keys and nTV
control keys can be used to control the TV selected with
dInput selector.
• When a remote control code for a device other than a TV is
registered with dInput selector, keys including the
kCursor and mNumeric keys can be used to control
external components, and the nTV control keys can be used
to control the TV registered with nA.
• When a TV remote control code is registered with nA, only
nTV control keys can be used to control the TV.
En
115
SETUP
MAIN
Controlling other components with the remote control
ZONE 2
CODE SET
o
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
d
Default remote control code
settings
Registering remote control codes
for external component operations
The following remote control codes are assigned to input
sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of
available remote control codes, refer to “Remote Control
Code Search” in the CD-ROM.
The following section describes how to register remote
control code using an example of the registration of the
remote control codes of a Yamaha BD player connected
to HDMI2 jack.
AUDIO
AV
1
DOCK
HDMI OUT
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
Category
Manufacturer
Remote
control code
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
BD
DVD
TV
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
HDMI1
Blu-ray player/
recorder
Yamaha
2064
HDMI2
—
—
—
HDMI3
—
—
—
HDMI4
—
—
—
HDMI5
—
—
—
AV1
—
—
—
AV2
—
—
—
AV3
CD player
Yamaha
5095
AV4
—
—
—
AV5
—
—
—
AV6
—
—
—
AUDIO1
—
—
—
AUDIO2
—
—
—
NET
—
—
—
V-AUX
—
—
—
DOCK
—
—
—
TUNER
—
—
—
SIRIUS
—
—
—
SCENE
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
MUTE
d HDMI2
n TV control keys
nA
o CODE SET
Press oCODE SET using a pointed object
such as the tip of a ballpoint pen.
blinks twice
MAIN
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
TUN./CH
Input
MOVIE
2
n
• Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1
minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat
from step 2.
• Remote control code of an external component cannot
be set from the name or model number of a unit. Use
“Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to
search the available remote control codes from the
category or manufacturer of external components.
• If multiple remote control codes exist, first set the first
code in the list, if it does not work then try the other
codes.
1
1
3
2
3
4
Press dHDMI2 to switch the input source to
HDMI2. J1
Perform the following steps to register the selected
input source here to the remote control code.
Continues to the
next page
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CDROM to search the available remote control
codes from the category or manufacturer of
external components.
“2064” can be used for a Yamaha BD player.
J 1 : When you want to register a remote control code to the
nTV control keys, press nA (nTV control keys) in step
3.
En
116
SETUP
MAIN
Controlling other components with the remote control
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
o
p
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
4
d
AUDIO
4
Enter a remote control code “2064” using
mNumeric keys. J1
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
NET
2
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
Registration successful: blinks twice
Registration failed: blinks 6 times
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
MAIN
TV
CD
RADIO
i
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
3
Enter “9981” using mNumeric keys.
9
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1
minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat
from step 1.
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
Resetting all remote control codes for external
components to the initial factory settings.
4
Once the remote control code is registered successfully
pSOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice.
HDMI OUT
TUNER
6
0
Resetting all remote control codes
1
Press oCODE SET using a pointed object
such as the tip of a ballpoint pen.
8
9
1
Once the remote control code is reset successfully
pSOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice.
Reset successful: blinks twice
Reset failed: blinks 6 times
MAIN
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
OPTION
ON SCREEN
blinks twice
HDMI
1
4
MAIN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
3
HDMI
1
2
3
4
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
2
POP-UP
MENU
• If the registration fails, repeat from step 2.
• In case of an external component with multiple remote
control codes, the other remote control codes may be
supported. Repeat from step 2 with the other remote
control codes.
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
m
ZONE 2
CODE SET
If setup fails, repeat from step 1.
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
2
3
4
Press pSOURCE/RECEIVER on the remote
control.
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
d HDMI2
i SCENE
m Numeric keys
o CODE SET
p SOURCE/RECEIVER
5
To switch between BD player linked to
scene selections, press iSCENE and at the
same time press dHDMI2 and hold it for
approximately 3 seconds.
Then you can operate the external components by
switching the input source to HDMI2, or selecting
HDMI2 in the registered scene.
Same steps for operating other external components,
press iSCENE and at the same time press the input
source key selected in step 3 and hold it for
approximately 3 seconds.
J 1 : When you want to register a remote control code to the
nTV control keys, enter the TV remote control code in step 4.
En
117
SETUP
Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)
The Advanced Setup menu can be used for unit initialization and other useful extended functions. The Advanced Setup menu can be operated as follows.
Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup
menu
3
Rotate PROGRAM selector to select the item to be
set from the following items.
Setting the impedance of speakers
In the Advanced Setup menu, you can set the following settings.
1
2
Switch this unit to the standby mode.
SP IMP.
Sets the impedance of speakers.
REMOTE ID
Changes the remote control ID of a receiver.
Press MAIN ZONE A while pressing and holding
STRAIGHT on the front panel.
SR PIN
Resets the parental lock code for the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio tuner.
Release STRAIGHT when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed
on the front panel display.
After a few seconds, the top menu items are displayed.
TV FORMAT
Specifies the TV’s color encoding format.
MON.CHK
Removes the up-scaling limitation on HDMI video
output.
INIT
Initializes various settings for this unit.
FIRM UPDATE
Update the firmware of this unit.
VERSION
Check the version of firmware currently installed on
this unit.
MAIN ZONE A
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2
ZONE CONTROL
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
SPIMP.-8MIN
Changes the unit settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected. J1
6MIN
Select the impedance when 6 Ω speakers are
connected.
8MIN (Default)
Select the impedance when speakers above 8 Ω are
connected.
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INPUT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
PROGRAM
PHONES
YPAO MIC
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SILENT CINEMA
PROGRAM selector
4
5
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select the value you
want to change.
Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then
switch it on again.
The settings become effective and the unit is powered on.
J 1 : For detailed procedures of speaker impedance settings, refer to “Changing
speaker impedance” (☞p. 18).
En
118
SETUP
MAIN
Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
o
p
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
4
AUDIO
2
Avoiding crossing remote control
signals when using multiple
Yamaha receivers
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
SIRIUS
NET
HDMI OUT
TUNER
REMOTEID-ID1
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
TUN./CH
The remote control of the unit can only receive signals
from a receiver which has an identical ID (remote
control ID). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers,
you can set each remote control with a unique remote
control ID for its corresponding receiver.
On the contrary, if you are setting the same remote
control ID for all receivers, you can use one remote
control to operate 2 receivers.
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
ID1 (Default)
REC
ID2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
m
Receives the remote control signals set in
ID1.
Receives the remote control signals set in
ID2.
■ To change the remote control ID
Resetting the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio™ parental lock code
Perform each of the following steps within
1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if
more than 1 minute passes since the last operation.
To reset, repeat from step 1.
1
2
3
Press oCODE SET using a pointed
object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen.
Press pSOURCE/RECEIVER.
Enter the desired remote control ID code.
SRPIN-CANCEL
Reset the SIRIUS Satellite Radio parental lock code to
the factory default setting. If you forget the code, it can
be reset.
RESET
Resets the code to the factory default
setting.
CANCEL (Default)
Cancels resetting of the parental lock
code.
To switch to ID1:
Enter “5019” using mNumeric keys.
To switch to ID2:
Enter “5020” using mNumeric keys.
Once the remote control code is registered successfully
pSOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice.
ENT
INPUT
MUTE
ID1 is set for both remote control and receiver by
default. To avoid crossing remote control, change the
remote control ID for both remote control and
receiver.
Registration successful: blinks twice
Registration failed: blinks 6 times
MAIN
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
m Numeric keys
o CODE SET
p SOURCE/RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
• If setup fails, repeat from step 1.
• Returns to ID1 after the remote control code is
initialized (☞p. 117).
En
119
SETUP
Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)
Changing TV format
Initializing various settings for this unit
TVFORMAT-NTSC
INIT- CANCEL
Change the color encoding format of OSD to PAL or NTSC
(default), to match the format used by the TV connected via the
HDMI OUT 1-2 or VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack.
Initializes various settings stored in this unit and sets it back to
default.
Select the items to be initialized from the following.
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “NETWORK.”
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2
Removing HDMI video output up-scaling
limits
MON.CHK-YES
Removes the up-scaling limitation on video resolution when this
unit and a TV are connected via HDMI jacks.
If a resolution supported by the monitor cannot be detected when
configuring the up-scaling settings, this setting will remove the
output limitation.
YES (Default)
Video output signals of a resolution not supported by
the TV will not be transmitted.
SKIP
This unit ignores the TV’s support capability and
transmits input video signals to the TV.
Initializes all parameters for the sound programs.
VIDEO
Resets video conversion settings (resolution/aspect
ratio) in the Setup menu.
NETWORK
Resets the settings of network such as IP address or
the account of vTuner.
ALL
Resets this unit to default factory settings.
CANCEL (Default)
Does not initialize.
When an option other than CANCEL is selected, the applicable
default settings will be restored when the unit switches to standby
mode.
Firmware update
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INPUT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
PROGRAM
PHONES
DSP PARAM
ZONE CONTROL
YPAO MIC
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SILENT CINEMA
INFO
NETWORK
2
Updates the firmware of this unit via network.
Press INFO to start update with the selected option.
• Do not use this feature unless the firmware must be updated.
• Be sure to read the information supplied with updates before
updating firmware.
Firmware version
FIRMUPDATE
Update the firmware of this unit. For details on updating the
firmware, refer to information supplied with updates.
When this unit detects the latest firmware over a network, the
message indicating that the firmware is released is displayed in the
System information (☞p. 114).
VERSIONX.XX
Check the version of firmware currently installed on this unit.
About the latest firmware
When installing the latest firmware, the new functions or fix of
failure may be served.
• The latest firmware can be downloaded from our website.
• While displaying the ON SCREEN menu or “System” from
Information menu, the information on the latest firmware is
displayed via a network.
En
120
SETUP
Using the HDMI Control function
This unit supports the HDMI Control function, which allows you to
operate external components via HDMI. If devices that support
HDMI Control (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link-compatible TVs,
DVD/Blu-ray Disc players, etc.) are connected J1, remote
controls for those devices can be used to perform the following
operations:
– Power synchronization (on/standby)
– Volume control, including Mute
– Changing the volume of the audio output signal device (either the
TV or this unit)
1
2
3
Connect the TV that supports the HDMI Control
function to this unit’s HDMI output jack.
4
Set the TV and this unit’s HDMI Control function to
“On.”
8
If BD/DVD player that supports the HDMI Control
function are connected to this unit, turn them on.
Connect the BD/DVD player that supports the HDMI
Control function to this unit’s HDMI input jack.
This unit
Confirm that the input source for the BD/DVD players
has been selected. If a different input source has been
selected, change it manually.
Turn on the TV and this unit.
TV and BD/DVD
player
Confirm that the video signal from the player is being
properly received by the TV.
Refer to the TV’s instruction manual on how to operate external
components.
Operations 1-8 will not be required more than twice.
TV
Control signal
(such as volume control)
This unit
Confirm that “HDMI Control” is set to “On”
(☞p. 106) and select the HDMI OUT jack connected
to the TV in “Control Select” (☞p. 106). J2
TV and BD/DVD
player
Check the instruction manuals for those devices.
HDMI connection
HDMI
Remote control of TV
5
Turn the TV off.
6
Turn the TV on.
7
Change the TV’s input setting to the input jack that
is connected to this unit (e.g., HDMI1).
This unit
NOTE
The following is an example of how to connect this unit, a TV,
and a BD/DVD player. Follow the instructions in your TV and
BD/DVD player manuals, as well as the ones written below.
– Set the TV’s HDMI Control function to “On”
– Follow the AV amplifier connection instructions, and connect
this unit to the TV
Other synchronized HDMI Control devices are turned off with the
TV. If they are not synchronized, turn them off manually.
9
Confirm that this unit is properly synchronized with
the TV through the following operations by using the
TV remote control.
• Power On/Off
• Volume Control
• Switching between audio output devices
If this unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations,
check that the HDMI Control function is set to “On” for both
devices.
If they will not properly synchronize, unplugging and replugging the devices and turning them on and off may solve the
problem.
Confirm that this unit has turned on in conjunction with the TV. If
it is still off, turn it on manually.
J 1 : We recommend that you use TVs and BD/DVD players from the same
manufacturer whenever possible.
J 2 : The default setting for the HDMI Control function is “Off.”
En
121
SETUP
MAIN
Using the HDMI Control function
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
2
4
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
AUDIO
AV
1
DOCK
HDMI OUT
CATEGORY
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
TV
CD
j
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
To use other jacks to input audio signals from TV, carry
out the following procedure.
When the HDMI Control (☞p. 121) is operating
properly, the input source of this unit is automatically
changed to match operations carried out on the TV.
When the TV is connected with HDMI OUT 1, the
default input jack is AV4. If the AV4 optical digital jack
is connected to the TV’s audio output jack, then you can
enjoy TV sound through this unit right away.
1
2
Audio output
(Optical)
DOCK
HDMI 1
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
1
(BD/DVD)
SELECTABLE
5
Press kCursor D / E repeatedly to select
“HDMI” and press kENTER.
Connect TV’s audio output to this unit.
The input jacks listed below are available to input TV’s
audio signals. Use the same jack type as used for the
TV.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
VOLUME
PR
OUT
75
PB
PB
Coaxial digital audio output
AV2 or AV3
Analog stereo output
AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
Y
DISPLAY
AV1 or AV4 (Default)
IN
O
k
Input jack
R
GND AM
PR
ENTER
TV output jack
Optical digital audio output
ARC
ANTENNA
OPTICAL
MONITOR OUT
TR
TV
TOP
MENU
Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Setup” and press kENTER.
Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI
cable.
2
ARC
SIRIUS
RETURN
4
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
■ Switching the input source on this
unit automatically when listening
to TV audio
HDMI
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
Available input jacks
O
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
OPTICAL
(CD)
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURR
MU
REC
DOCK
HDMI 1
NETWORK
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
INPUT
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI 5
2
ARC
2
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
1
1
SELECTABLE
ARC
SIRIUS
When the TV is connected with HDMI OUT 2, the
default input jack is AV1. If the AV1 optical digital jack
is connected to the TV’s audio output jack, then you can
enjoy TV sound through this unit right away.
ANTENNA
FM
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
CENTER
SURRO
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
PR
IN
OUT
75
PB
PB
VIDEO
VIDEO
Y
Y
+12V
MONITOR OUT
0.1A MAX.
TRIGGER OUT
Continues to the
next page
CENTER
MUTE
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(CD)
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
3
OPTICAL
( TV )
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
SUR
Press jON SCREEN. J1
J 1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 98)
for details on the Setup menu.
En
122
SETUP
MAIN
Using the HDMI Control function
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
6
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
AUDIO
Make sure that “HDMI Control” is “On”
When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off,” press
kENTER and kCursor B / C to set to “On.”
AV
Press kCursor C to select “Control Select”
and press kENTER.
DOCK
HDMI OUT
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
Use kCursor B / C to select the HDMI OUT
jack connected to the TV.
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
j
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
7
8
9
10
11
k
Press kCursor C to select “TV Audio
Input” and press kENTER.
■ Single HDMI cable input to TV
audio with Audio Return Channel
function
3
Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select
“Setup” and press kENTER.
4
Press kCursor D / E repeatedly to select
“HDMI” and press kENTER.
When using a TV that supports HDMI functions and
Audio Return Channel function, audio/video output
from this unit to the TV or audio output from the TV to
this unit can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable
(Audio Return Channel function). Audio signals
transmitted from the TV to this unit can be assigned to
any input source.
1
Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI
cable.
Use kCursor B / C to select the input
jack connected in step 2.
TV
HDMI
Press jON SCREEN when you have
finished changing the settings.
If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals,
this unit will automatically switch to the input
source chosen in step 10.
HDMI
Video / Audio
output
TV audio
output
ENT
HDMI
INPUT
NETWORK
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
1
MUTE
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
(BD/DVD)
2
ARC
SELECTABLE
ARC
ANTENNA
NT
FM
FRONT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Continues to the
next page
CENTER
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
IN
OUT
75
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C / D / E
k ENTER
VIDEO
2
PB
VIDEO
Press jON SCREEN. J1
J 1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 98)
for details on the Setup menu.
En
123
SETUP
MAIN
Using the HDMI Control function
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
V-AUX
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
AUDIO
5
Make sure that “HDMI Control” is “On.”
6
7
8
9
Press kCursor C to select “Control Select”
and press kENTER.
2
When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off,” press
kENTER and kCursor B / C to set to “On.”
AV
HDMI OUT
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
j
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
k
Use kCursor B / C to select the HDMI OUT
jack connected to the TV.
Press kCursor C to select “TV Audio
Input” and press kENTER.
Use kCursor B / C to select the input
source to which the HDMI audio signals will
be assigned, and press kRETURN.
MUTE
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
10
Press kCursor C to select “ARC (Audio
Return Channel)” and press
kENTER. J1
11
Press kCursor C to select “On.”
12
Press jON SCREEN to close the Setup
menu.
The Audio Return Channel function will turn on.
INPUT
MUTE
j ON SCREEN
k Cursor B / C
k ENTER
k RETURN
If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals,
this unit will automatically switch to the input
source chosen in step 9.
J 1 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected
for the input source cannot be used.
En
124
SETUP
Using multi-zone configuration
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone2). You can
control this unit from the second zone using the supplied remote control.
From the ZONE2 OUT jacks
■ Using the external amplifier
An amplifier located in the secondary zone can be connected to this unit as shown below.
Amplifier
Main zone
Second zone
(Zone2)
Audio input
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI 5
AUDIO
L
SPEAKERS
DVD player (etc.)
EXTRA SP
FRONT
CENTER
R
SURROUND BACK/
SURROUND
BI-AMP
ZONE2/PRESENCE
Remote control
This unit
Infrared signal
emitter
SINGLE
Infrared signal
receiver
Amplifier
NTER
CENTER
R
WOOFER
From the REMOTE OUT jack
SINGLE
L
Second Zone
(Zone2)
AUDIO
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
PRE OUT
1 SUBWOOFER 2
To the REMOTE IN jack
Only analog signal can be sent to Zone2. If you want to output sound from Zone2, connect an
external component to AV5-6, AUDIO1-2, or VIDEO AUX by analog connection. For example, if
you want to output sound from an HDMI DVD player in Zone2, you must connect the component to
this unit by both HDMI and analog connections.
Connecting Zone2
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone.
• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits infrared signals from the remote control
to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone.
• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone.
Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we
recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the
Zone2 connections that best meet your requirements.
To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit
Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP jacks directly (☞p. 18).
■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks for multi-zone components
This unit is equipped with REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks. You can use these jacks to control
this unit and other components from Zone2 (☞p. 30).
Some Yamaha models can be directly connected to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. These models
may not require an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown
below.
REMOTE
IN
Infrared signal
receiver
REMOTE
OUT
IN
This unit
REMOTE
OUT
Yamaha
component
En
125
SETUP
MAIN
ZONE 2
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Using multi-zone configuration
b
q
Controlling Zone2
Using the party mode
The remote control can be used to select and control
Zone2 devices. The available operations are as follows:
Use this feature to play main zone sources in Zone2
simultaneously. This feature is useful when you want to
play back main sources as background music in a home
party, etc. When using the party mode, set “Party Mode
Set” to “Enable” (☞p. 109).
HDMI
1
2
3
5
V-AUX
1
4
AUDIO
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
MULTI
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
HDMI OUT
CATEGORY
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
TUN./CH
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
MUTE
b MAIN/ZONE2
d Input selector
g SLEEP
h PARTY
q RECEIVER A
h
■ Activating the Zone2 operation
Set bMAIN/ZONE2 to ZONE2 before attempting to
use the remote control to control Zone2 devices.
Press hPARTY to turn on or off the party mode.
“PARTY MODE ON” or “PARTY MODE OFF” appears
on the front panel display or the TV screen.
While this unit is in the party mode, the ZONE2
indicators turn on in the front panel display.
Input audio signals are mixed down to 2ch Stereo and
output at the analog ZONE2 OUT jacks.
■ Operating Zone2
To enable and disable the audio output to Zone2
Press qRECEIVER A.
REC
INPUT
• Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source of Zone2.
• Tuning into SIRIUS Satellite Radio when “SIRIUS” is
selected as the input source of Zone2.
•
Adjust the volume of Zone2 devices (when connected via
g
the built-in amplifier).
mode
OPTION
ON SCREEN
d • Selecting the input source of Zone2.
To select an input source for Zone2
Press dInput selector.
ENT
Only the following sources are available for
the Zone2.
V-AUX (only analog audio input), AUDIO1-2 (only
analog audio input), NET, DOCK, TUNER
To enable the sleep timer for Zone2
Automatically switch the Zone2 device to standby mode
after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer).
Press gSLEEP repeatedly to specify a time for the
sleep timer function.
Sleep 120min.
Sleep Off
Sleep 90min.
Sleep 30min.
Sleep 60min.
En
126
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below, or if the instructions below do not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
General
Problem
Cause
Remedy
See
page
The power will not
turn on.
The protection circuitry operated
3 times consecutively.
As a safety precaution, when the protection
circuitry operates 3 times consecutively, the
capability to turn on the power is disabled.
Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or
service center to request repair.
—
The unit enters
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not completely
inserted.
Connect the power cable properly to an AC
wall outlet.
—
(When this unit is turned back on
and “CHECK SP WIRES!” is
displayed.) The protection
circuitry has been activated
because this unit was turned on
while a speaker cable was shorted.
Make sure that all speaker cables between
this unit and speakers are connected
properly.
19
The internal microcomputer is
hung-up due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or
excessive static electricity) or by a
drop in power supply voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC
wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then
plug it in again.
—
The batteries in the remote control
may have lost their charge.
Replace all batteries.
The protection circuitry has been
activated because of a short circuit,
etc.
This unit cannot be
turned off or does
not work properly.
The unit enters
standby mode.
The sleep timer has turned off the
unit.
Problem
Cause
Remedy
See
page
After display of a
countdown on the
front panel, the unit
goes into standby
mode.
If you do not use take any action,
the Auto Power Down function
operates.
Turn on the unit, and play the source again.
—
In the Setup menu “Auto Power Down”
(“Function” → “Auto Power Down”),
increase the time until switching to standby
mode, or turn off the Auto Power Down
function.
110
No sound.
Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
25
Speaker connections are not
secure.
Secure the connections.
19
The HDMI components connected
to the unit do not support the
HDCP copy protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the
HDCP copy protection standards.
—
The audio input into the device is
set to playback through the TV.
In the Setup menu, set the “Amp” of “Audio
Output” (“HDMI” → “Audio Output” →
“Amp”) to “On.”
107
No appropriate input source has
been selected.
Select an appropriate input source with
Input selector.
42
7
—
—
The volume is turned down or
muted.
Turn up the volume.
Check that the speaker with an impedance
of at least 6 Ω.
18
Use an input source that has signals that can
be reproduced on this unit.
Check that the speaker wires are not
touching each other, then turn the unit back
on.
—
Signals that this unit cannot
reproduce are being input from a
source component, such as a CDROM.
—
Check that the speaker impedance settings
are correct.
Turn on the unit, and play the source again.
—
En
127
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
Problem
No picture.
No sound is output
from a specific
speaker.
See
page
Cause
Remedy
The video signal output from this
unit is not supported by a monitor
connected to this unit via the
HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks.
Displays the Advanced Setup menu and
select “VIDEO” in “INIT” to reset the video
parameters.
120
Displays the Advanced Setup menu and set
“MON.CHK” to “YES.”
120
An appropriate video input is not
selected on the TV.
Select an appropriate video input on the TV.
—
The speaker is malfunctioning.
Check the Speaker indicators on
the front panel display. If the
corresponding indicator lights up,
connect another speaker and check
if sound is output.
If sound is not output, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
10
The playback component or
speakers are not connected
properly.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
19, 25
Output from that speaker is
disabled.
Check the Speaker indicators on the front
panel display. If the corresponding indicator
is turned off, try the following.
1) Change to a different input source.
2) With the selected sound program, sound
is not output from that speaker. Select
another sound program.
3) “None” may have been selected for that
speaker on this unit. Display “Speaker” in
the Setup menu, and set respective
parameters to enable output from that
speaker (“Speaker” → “Manual Setup” →
“Configuration”).
10, 99
The volume of that speaker is set
to the minimum in “Speaker” in
the Setup menu.
Display “Speaker” in the Setup menu and
adjust the volume (“Speaker” → “Manual
Setup” → “Level”).
101
(If hardly any sound comes from
one channel)
Speaker output balance is not set
correctly.
Balance the volume of each speaker from
“Level” in the Setup menu (“Speaker” →
“Manual Setup” → “Level”).
101
Sound may not be output from
certain channels, depending on the
input source or sound program.
Try another sound program.
44
Problem
Cause
See
page
Remedy
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When a monaural source sound
program is applied, for some
surround decoders, sound from all
channels is output from the center
speaker.
Try another sound program.
44
No sound is heard
from the presence
speakers.
This unit is in straight decoding
mode and a monaural source is
being played back.
Press STRAIGHT to exit straight decoding
mode.
45
Sound may not be output from
certain channels depending on
input sources or sound programs.
Try another sound program.
44
This unit is in straight decoding
mode and a monaural source is
being played back.
Press STRAIGHT to exit straight decoding
mode.
45
Sound may not be output from
certain channels depending on
input sources or sound programs.
Try another sound program.
44
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speakers.
“Extended Surround” in the
Option menu is set to “OFF,” or an
input signal does not contain a
surround back flag with “Extended
Surround” set to “Auto.”
Set “Extended Surround” other than “OFF”
or “Auto.”
55
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
A subwoofer is not connected, or it
is inactive.
Check that a subwoofer is connected
correctly, and from the Setup menu
“Subwoofer” (“Speaker” → “Manual
Setup” → “Configuration” →
“Subwoofer”), set the subwoofer to “Use.”
20,
101
The subwoofer is turned off.
Turn the subwoofer power on.
If the subwoofer includes an Auto Power
Off function, then lower the Auto Power Off
sensitivity settings.
—
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
The source does not contain LFE
(☞p. 135) or low frequency
signals.
The right
combination of audio
/ video jacks to
connect cannot be
found.
Combine input connected to the
external component video output
with another input audio jack.
—
Display the Input menu for the connected
video output, select “Audio In” and select
the jack to use for audio input.
En
88
128
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Remedy
See
page
The audio input
sources cannot be
played in the desired
digital audio signal
format.
The connected component is not
set to output the desired digital
audio signals.
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency
equipment.
This unit is too close to other
digital or radio frequency
equipment.
Noise/hum noise is
heard.
Incorrect cable connection.
Connect the audio cables properly.
If the problem persists, the cables may be
defective.
—
A DTS-CD is being played back.
1) When only noise is output
If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly
input to this unit, only noise is output.
Connect the playback component to this
unit by digital connection and playback the
DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved,
the problem may results from the playback
component. Consult the manufacturer of the
playback component.
2) When noise is output during playback or
skip operation
Before playing back the DTS-CD, display
the Input menu after selecting the input
source and set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS.”
—
The component connected to the
output jacks of this unit is not
turned on.
When the component connected to the
output jacks of this unit is not turned on, the
sound may be distorted, or the volume may
decreased due to the nature of AV receivers.
Turn on all components connected to this
unit.
—
“Max Volume” is set to a low
value.
Set it to a higher value.
103
The volume cannot
be increased, or the
sound is distorted.
Set the playback component properly
referring to its instruction manual.
Move this unit further away from such
equipment.
HDMI™
—
Problem
—
Cause
See
page
Remedy
The front panel
display HDMI
indicator is flashing.
An error with the HDMI
connection has occurred.
Try re-inserting the HDMI cable.
—
Confirm that HDMI video that is not
supported by the unit is not being input
(Information menu → “Video
information”).
113
No picture or sound.
The number of components is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI components.
—
The connected HDMI component
does not support high-bandwidth
digital copyright protection
(HDCP).
Connect an HDMI component that supports
HDCP.
—
The TV audio output is not
connected to this unit, or the
setting to match operations carried
out on TV is not set.
Connect the TV audio output to this unit,
and then select the connected input source
in “TV Audio Input” (Setup menu → HDMI
→ TV Audio Input).
106
(When using Audio Return
Channel function)
The Audio Return Channel
function is not working.
Make sure that your TV supports Audio
Return Channel.
Set the Audio Return Channel function to
on (Setup menu → HDMI → ARC (Audio
Return Channel)).
106
(When using HDMI
Control function)
TV sound is not
output from this unit
when operating the
remote control of the
TV.
En
129
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
Tuner (FM/AM)
AM
FM
Problem
FM stereo reception
is noisy.
Cause
You are too far from the station
transmitter, or the input from the
antenna is weak.
Remedy
See
page
Check the antenna connections.
33
Switch to monaural mode.
59
Replace the outdoor antenna with a more
sensitive multi-element antenna.
—
Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or
place it in a different location.
—
There is distortion,
and clear reception
cannot be obtained
even with a good FM
antenna.
There is multi-path interference.
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
You are in an area far from a
station, or input from the antenna
is weak.
Replace the outdoor antenna with a more
sensitive multi element antenna.
—
Use TUN./CH H / I to manually select the
station.
57
“No Presets” is
displayed.
No preset stations are registered.
Register stations you want to listen to as
preset stations before operation.
57
“Wrong Station” is
displayed.
An invalid FM/AM frequency has
been input.
Input a frequency that can be received.
—
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak, or the antenna
connections are loose.
Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation.
33
Use the manual tuning method.
57
Automatic station
preset does not
work.
Automatic station preset is not
available for AM stations.
Use manual station preset.
57
Continuous
crackling and
hissing noises are
heard.
The supplied AM loop antenna is
not connected.
Connect the AM loop antenna correctly
even if you use an outdoor antenna.
33
The noises may be caused by
lightning, fluorescent lamps,
motors, thermostats, or other
electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise,
but it can be reduced by installing and
properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna.
33
Buzzing and whining
noises are heard.
A TV set is being used nearby.
Move this unit away from the TV set.
—
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
Problem
SIRIUS Satellite
Radio information is
not displayed
properly.
Display
Cause
The hold function is enabled.
Cause
See
page
Remedy
Press HOLD to disable the hold function.
65
See
page
Remedy
ANTENNA ERROR
The antenna is not connected to
the SiriusConnect tuner properly.
Check the connection of the antenna and
SiriusConnect tuner.
61
SIRIUS LOADING
This unit is communicating with
the SiriusConnect tuner.
The message disappears normally within
several tens of seconds.
—
En
130
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
Display
CHECK SR TUNER
NOT SUPPORTED
ACQUIRING
UPDATING
Cause
Remedy
See
page
The SiriusConnect tuner is not
connected to the SIRIUS jack of
this unit correctly.
Check the connection of the SiriusConnect
tuner and this unit.
61
The SiriusConnect tuner is not
connected to the AC wall outlet.
Connect the power cable of the
SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet.
—
This unit does not support the
connected SIRIUS Satellite Radio
tuner.
Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this
unit supports,
—
The signal is too weak.
Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the
SiriusConnect tuner. Check the antenna
reception level from the Antenna
information on the front panel display, or
the SIRIUS Information screen on the TV
screen.
Problem
64, 65
The SiriusConnect tuner is
updating the channel list.
Wait until the updating is complete.
—
The period of the subscription is
end.
Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the
subscription.
—
F/W UPDATING
The SiriusConnect tuner is
updating the firmware.
Wait until the updating is complete.
—
CALL SIRIUS
(CALL 888-539SIRIUS TO
SUBSCRIBE)
The selected channel is not
subscribed.
Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe
the selected channel.
URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/
Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-5397474)
—
Select another channel.
62
SUB UPDATED
The subscription information is
updated.
LOCK
The parental lock function is
enabled.
INVALID
The selected channel is currently
out of service.
Not Available
The operation you made is not
available.
Network
Use Numeric keys to enter the 4-digit code,
select OK and then press ENT.
66
Reset the SIRIUS Satellite Radio parental
lock code to the factory default setting.
119
Select another channel.
62
See
page
Cause
Remedy
The IP address is not set properly.
Set the DHCP server function of the router
to ON. Alternately, perform manual
configuration according to the current
operating environment.
108
The network cable is not
connected.
Connect it properly.
32
The music in the PC
server cannot be
played back.
The PC does not have Windows
Media Player installed in it.
Install Windows Media Player in the PC.
—
The music is recorded in a format
that cannot be played on this unit.
This unit cannot play music
formats other than WMA, MP3,
MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC and WAV
(PCM format). Also note that it
cannot play certain music files
even if these are recorded in the
WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC,
FLAC, or WAV format.
Play music recorded in a format that this
unit is compatible with.
—
The Internet Radio
cannot be played.
The firewall of the network device
is activated. The Internet Radio
can be played only when it passes
through the port designated by
each radio station. The port
number is variable depending on
radio station.
Check the firewall setting of the network
device.
—
Connection to the Internet is
disconnected.
Check the configuration of the network
device, and then contact the network
connection provider.
—
The PC server/
Internet Radio does
not function
properly.
En
131
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
Display
Connect error
Disconnected
Access denied
Unable to play
See
page
Cause
Remedy
There is a problem with the signal
path from your network to this
unit.
Check the connection between this unit and
the LAN port on your router or hub.
32
Make sure your router is properly connected
and turned on. Also, make sure your modem
is properly connected and turned on when
you are attempting to listen to Internet
Radio.
32
The PC server previously
connected to this unit no longer
exists.
Connect this unit to the available PC server.
32
The PC you are attempting to
connect has denied connection.
Configure the sharing setting of Window
Media Player 11/12 and select this unit as a
device to which music contents are shared.
67
Make sure Windows Media Player is
installed on your PC.
—
Check that the songs currently stored on
your PC are playable (MP3, WMA, MPEG4 AAC, and WAV).
—
Store some other playable music files (MP3,
WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV) on your
PC.
—
Try preparing a network exclusively for use
with this unit to separate it from general
network traffic.
—
This unit cannot play back the
songs currently stored on your PC.
The network may be overloaded
with heavy traffic, and playback is
interrupted.
iPod™/iPhone™
Display
Loading...
Connect error
List updated
The list of the contents stored on
your PC server has been updated.
—
Bookmark On
The desired Internet Radio station
has been added to the Bookmarks
list.
—
Bookmark Off
The stored Internet Radio station
has been removed from the
Bookmarks list.
—
Cause
See
page
Remedy
The unit is in the process of
recognizing the connection with
your iPod/iPhone.
—
The unit is in the middle of
acquiring song lists from your
iPod/iPhone.
—
There is a problem with the signal
path from your iPod/iPhone to the
unit.
Turn off the unit and reconnect the
Universal Dock for iPod to the DOCK jack
of the unit.
79
Remove your iPod/iPhone from the
Universal Dock for iPod and then place it
back in the dock.
79
Connect an iPod/iPhone supported by the
unit.
—
Unknown iPod
The iPod/iPhone being used is not
supported by the unit.
iPod connected
Your iPod/iPhone is properly
placed in the Universal Dock for
iPod.
—
Your iPod/iPhone is properly
placed in the Yamaha iPod
wireless transmitter and connected
with this unit via wireless
transmission.
81
Your iPod/iPhone is removed from
the Universal Dock for iPod.
—
Your iPod/iPhone is disconnected
with this unit via wireless
transmission.
—
Disconnected
Unable to play
The unit cannot playback the
songs currently stored on your
iPod/iPhone.
Check that songs are currently stored on
your iPod/iPhone.
En
—
132
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
Bluetooth™
Display
Searching...
Remote control
Cause
Remedy
See
page
The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver and the Bluetooth
component are in the process of
pairing.
—
The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver and the Bluetooth
component are in the process of
establishing a connection.
—
Completed
The pairing is completed.
—
Canceled
The pairing is canceled.
—
BT connected
The connection between the
Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver and the Bluetooth
component is established.
—
The Bluetooth component is
disconnected from the Yamaha
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
—
Disconnected
Not found
The Bluetooth component is not
found.
Pairing may not have been
achieved.
During pairing:
– pairing must be performed on the
Bluetooth component and this unit
simultaneously. Check if the Bluetooth
component is in pairing mode.
During connecting:
– check if the Bluetooth component is
turned on.
– check if the Bluetooth component is
within 32 ft. (10 m) of the Yamaha
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
—
Try pairing again.
83
Problem
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.
External components
cannot be controlled
using the remote
control.
Cause
See
page
Remedy
Wrong distance or angle.
The remote control will function within a
maximum range of 20 ft. (6 m), and no
more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front
panel.
—
Direct sunlight or lighting (from
an inverter type of fluorescent
lamp, strobe light, etc.) is striking
the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition this
unit.
—
The batteries are weak.
Replace all batteries.
7
The remote control ID of the
remote control and this unit do not
match.
Match the remote control ID of this unit and
the remote control.
116
The remote control code is not
correctly set.
Set the remote control code correctly using
“Remote control code search” on the CDROM.
—
Try setting another code for the same
manufacturer using “Remote control code
search” on the CD-ROM.
—
If this unit does not work when you press
Cursor B / C / D / E, do the following.
When the key does not work during DVD
disc menu operation: press the Input
selector again.
When there is no response with remote
control operation of the Option menu/Setup
menu: press SOURCE/RECEIVER (it
should glow orange) and try operating the
remote control again.
—
—
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some
models that do not respond to the
remote control.
En
133
APPENDIX
Glossary
Audio information
Audio and video synchronization (Lipsync)
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that
involves both a problem, and the capability of maintaining audio and video
signals synchronized during post-production and transmission.
Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user
adjustment, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video
syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization
automatically and accurately without user interaction.
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One
amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the
other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this
arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This
restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each
amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely
independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and
center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range
audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects,
referred to as LFE (Low-Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the
surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environments are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic
range from maximum to minimum volumes that are reproduced by the 5
full-range channels, and the precise sound orientation generated using
digital sound processing provides listeners with unprecedented excitement
and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a
5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers
of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete
5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel,
and 2 surround left and right channels, instead of only 1 surround channel
for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and
“Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel
playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes
available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie
sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for highdefinition programming and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio
standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with
discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital
Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously. Supported
by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV
receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully
compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate
Dolby Digital.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce
realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo),
a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special
sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a
narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all
video tapes and laser discs, as well as in many TV and cable broadcasts.
The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal
processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel
to enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for
high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an
optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound
that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition
home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby
TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio
simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of
Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel
sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS
decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical
48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers
sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and
motion picture soundtracks on DVD video.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of
movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining
popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a
home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural
spatial representation of DTS Digital Surround in your home. This system
produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left,
right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as
a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES
decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back
channel to the existing 5.1-channel format.
DTS Express
This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-ray
discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. In the
case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling
you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while
playing the main program.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology
developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc.
Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology
delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering
a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz
audio simultaneously.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
Surround.
En
134
APPENDIX
Glossary
DTS-HD Master Audio
Neo:6
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed
for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an
optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound
that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition
home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master
Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio
simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the
optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD
Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel
audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback
by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels
with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are
two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode”
for movie sources.
DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital
storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as
single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while
noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common
occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high
sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the
PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or
higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This unit can
transmit or receive DSD signals via the HDMI jack.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is
digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is
used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses
a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of
time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded
as pulses and then modulated for recording.
Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits
FLAC
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is
sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of
accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the
number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is
determined based on the sampling rate, whereas the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of
quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number
of quantized bits, the more accurately the sound level can be reproduced.
This is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy
compression formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
WAV
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals, and has a frequency
range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1, because it only
enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by
the other 5-channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems.
MP3
One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the
irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate
by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said
to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps)
while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD.
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording
the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. It does not specify the
compression (coding) method so a desired compression method can be used
with it. By default, it is compatible with the PCM method (no compression)
and some compression methods including the ADPCM method.
WMA
An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It
employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high
compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the
human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by
about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music
CD.
Sound program information
CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for
use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many
speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as
room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so
widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that is heard.
Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses
Yamaha’s original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby
Digital, and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie
theater in the listening room of your own home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the
height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D feature achieves the
reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates
the accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your
listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in compression
artifacts. As a result, it compensates for flattened complexity due to the loss
of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of lowfrequency bass, providing improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for
headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be
enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you
to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers, by
using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual
CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a
center speaker.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. As it allows compression of data at a bit rate
lower than that of MPEG-2 AAC, it is used among others for mobile
telephones, portable audio players and other low-capacity devices requiring
high sound quality. In addition to the above types of devices, MPEG-4
AAC is also used to distribute contents on the Internet, and as such is
supported by computers, media servers and many other devices.
En
135
APPENDIX
Glossary
Video information
Deep Color
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into
the Y signal for luminance and the PB and PR signals for chrominance.
Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of
these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color
difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color
signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output
component signals.
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the
24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit
depth allows HDTVs and other displays increase from millions of colors to
billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal
transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast
ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and
white. Additionally, Deep Color increases the number of available colors
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry
supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an
interface between any sources (such as set-top boxes or AV receivers) and
audio/video monitors (such as digital televisions), HDMI supports
standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital
audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and
supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate
future enhancements and requirements.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal comprises the
three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and
synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component
transmits these three elements combined.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the
security requirements of content providers and system operators. For
further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://
www.hdmi.org/.”
“x.v.Color”
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more
extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that
were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color
gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and can
thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still
pictures and computer graphics.
Video conversion
Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is performed according to resolution of video signals as shown below. Analog-to-analog video conversion is also possible when “Analog to Analog Conversion” is
set to “On” (☞p. 104).
✓:
HDMI output
Resolution
480i/576i
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p
480i/576i
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
480p/576p
HDMI input
COMPONENT VIDEO output
✓
480p/576p
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
480i/576i
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
720p
480i/576i
1080i
✓
1080i
VIDEO input
720p
✓
1080i
1080p
COMPONENT
VIDEO input
480p/576p
VIDEO output
✓
720p
480i/576i
480i/576i
available conversion
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
En
136
APPENDIX
Information on HDMI™
■ HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Audio signal types
Audio signal formats
Compatible media
2ch Linear PCM
2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch Linear PCM
8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD,
etc.
DSD
2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit
SACD, etc.
Bitstream
Dolby Digital, DTS
DVD-Video, etc.
Bitstream (High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS Express
Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.
• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can playback the audio
sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the digital audio input (optical or coaxial) connections.
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately.
NOTES
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output,
depending on the type of the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components.
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details.
To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the
component outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the
component).
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents
downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not playback the audio
commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD content.
Video signals
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
–
–
–
–
480i/60 Hz
576i/50 Hz
480p/60 Hz
576p/50 Hz
– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
En
137
APPENDIX
About trademarks
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s:
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195;
7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered
trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
iPod™, iPhone™
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “iPhone” is a trademark
of Apple Inc.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its
subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii.
Rhapsody and the Rhapsody logo are registered trademarks of RealNetworks, Inc.
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect and
Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
This receiver supports network connections.
Bluetooth™
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a
license agreement.
En
138
APPENDIX
Specifications
■ Input
■ HDMI
■ Remote
• Analog Audio
RCA .....................................5 (AV 5-6, AUDIO 1-2, VIDEO AUX)
MULTI CH INPUT...................................................................... 8ch
FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER
• Input .......................................................6 (HDMI 1-5, VIDEO AUX)
• REMOTE IN.......................................................................................1
• Output .................................................................. 2 (HDMI OUT 1-2)
• REMOTE OUT...................................................................................1
• HDMI Specification...........................HDMI Version 1.4a compatible
Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lips Sync,
ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D Video
• TRIGGER OUT .................................................................................1
• Digital Audio
Optical .......................................................................2 (AV 1, AV 4)
Coaxial.......................................................................2 (AV 2, AV 3)
• Audio Format
Dolby Digital, DTS, DSD 6ch, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,
DTS-HD, PCM 2ch-8ch
• Analog Video
Composite.................................................5 (AV 3-6, VIDEO AUX)
Component .......................................................................2 (AV 1-2)
• Content Protection ..................................................HDCP compatible
• Other
DOCK.................................................. 1 (Audio, Composite Video)
■ Output
• Analog Audio
SPEAKERS .................................................... 9ch (7ch + Extra 2ch)
FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP L/R,
EXTRA SP (ZONE2/F.PRESENCE L/R)
PRE OUT..................................................................................... 9ch
FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER [Mono 2ch]
AV OUT...........................................................................................1
AUDIO OUT ................................................................................... 1
ZONE2 OUT ................................................................................... 1
• Analog Video
MONITOR OUT
Composite .....................................................................................1
Component....................................................................................1
AV OUT
Composite .....................................................................................1
■ Tuner
• Analog Tuner
FM/AM .......................................................................... 1 (TUNER)
• Satellite Radio Ready
SIRIUS Satellite Radio ................................................... 1 (SIRIUS)
■ Compatible Decoding Format
• Decoding Format
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital,
Dolby Digital EX, DTS-HD Master Audio,
DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS Express, DTS,
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24
• Post Decoding Format
Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II Music,
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game, DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
■ Network
• Ethernet (100Base-TX/10Base-TX) .................................................. 1
Internet Radio
Audio Format.............................................................. MP3, WMA
PC Server
Audio Format.............. MP3, WMA, WAV, MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC
Max Audio Support fs .............................................. 96 kHz/24 bit
Cover Art Format......................................................... PNG, JPEG
DLNA
Version................................................1.5 (DMP & DMR support)
Audio Format.............. MP3, WMA, WAV, MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC
Max Audio Support fs .............................................. 96 kHz/24 bit
Cover Art Format......................................................... PNG, JPEG
Internet Music Service
Rhapsody, SIRIUS Internet Radio
Network Control
Web Browser Control (supporting Friendly Name only),
MusicCAST2 Commander Support, Yamaha Network Control
Support (YNC)
Continues to the
next page
En
139
APPENDIX
Specifications
■ Audio Section
• Volume Control.........................................MUTE/-80 dB to +16.5 dB
■ FM Section
• Minimum RMS Output Power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09 % THD, 8 Ω)
FRONT L/R ................................................................. 95 W + 95 W
CENTER................................................................................... 95 W
SURROUND L/R ........................................................ 95 W + 95 W
SURROUND BACK L/R ......................................................... 95 W
• Tone Control Characteristics
Bass Boost/Cut ..............................................................±6 dB/50 Hz
Bass Turnover Frequency.......................................................350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut .........................................................±6 dB/20 kHz
Treble Turnover Frequency ...................................................3.5 kHz
• Tuning Range ........................................................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
FRONT L/R, 8/6/4/2 Ω......................................130/165/195/240 W
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F.
(FRONT, CENTER, SURROUND,
SURROUND BACK: Small) ............................................12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (SUBWOOFER) .....................................................24 dB/oct.
• Dynamic Headroom
8 Ω ........................................................................................ 1.36 dB
• Damping Factor
FRONT L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω .............................. 100 or more
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
AV 5 etc. ....................................................................200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH IN ...........................................................200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Level
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5 % THD) ................................... 2.3 V or more
• Output Level/Output Impedance
AV OUT....................................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
PRE OUT......................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE2 OUT ............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ..................................100 mV/560 Ω
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)
Mono..................................................................... 3.0 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ration (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 74 dB/70 dB
[U.S.A. model] HD .................................................................. 80 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo .................................................................. 0.3 %/0.3 %
• Antenna Input .........................................................75 Ω (unbalanced)
■ Video Section
■ AM Section
• Video Format (MONITOR OUT, Wall Paper/OSD) ................. NTSC
• Tuning Range ............................................................ 530 to 1710 kHz
• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .............................NTSC/PAL
• Composite Video Signal Level ........................................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Component Video Signal Level
Y.................................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
PB/PR .......................................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) .......1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................... 50 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)
Component ................................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB
■ General
• Power Supply............................................................ AC 120 V, 60 Hz
• Power Consumption .....................................................400 W/500 VA
• Standby Power Consumption (Reference Data)
HDMI Control Off/Standby Through Off.....................0.2 W or less
HDMI Control On/Standby Through On
(Input: HDMI 1, no HDMI signal is input) .............. 2.7 W (typical)
NET Standby On....................................................... 4.5 W (typical)
• Frequency Response
AV 5 etc. to FRONT L/R (10 Hz to 100 kHz).....................+0/-3 dB
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
................................ 435 x 171 x 363mm (17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 14-1/2 in)
• Total Harmonic Distortion
AV 5 etc. (Pure Direct) to FRONT L/R
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W/8 Ω) ..................................... 0.06 % or less
• Weight..................................................................... 11.3 kg (24.9 lbs.)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
AV 5 etc. (Pure Direct, input shorted, 250 mV)
to FRONT L/R .........................................................100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
FRONT L/R ................................................................150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
AV 5 etc. (input 5.1 kΩ shorted)...................... 60 dB/45 dB or more
En
140
APPENDIX
Index
Numerics
5 channel speaker layout .............................................................. 16
5.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 15
7.1-channel speaker connection ................................................... 17
7.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 14
A
Account Status, Input menu ......................................................... 88
Adaptive DRC, Option menu....................................................... 54
Advanced Setup menu ............................................................... 118
All channel search mode .............................................................. 63
AM antenna connection ............................................................... 33
AM tuning.................................................................................... 57
Analog to Analog Conversion, Video Setup.............................. 104
ARC (Audio Return Channel), HDMI Setup............................. 106
Aspect, Processing, Video Setup ............................................... 105
Audio information, Information menu....................................... 113
Audio Input, Input menu.............................................................. 88
AUDIO jack ................................................................................. 21
Audio Output, HDMI Setup....................................................... 107
Audio Return Channel function ................................................. 123
Auto Power Down, Function Setup ........................................... 110
Auto Preset................................................................................... 60
Auto Setup, Speaker Setup .......................................................... 99
B
BD player connection .................................................................. 25
Bi-amp connection, speaker......................................................... 18
Bluetooth™ component playback................................................ 83
Bookmark Off, Internet Radio ..................................................... 69
Bookmark On, Internet Radio...................................................... 69
Browse view................................................................................. 56
C
Cable plug .................................................................................... 21
Category search mode.................................................................. 63
Center Image, Sound Program menu ........................................... 97
Center Level, Sound Program menu ............................................ 96
Center speaker............................................................................. 13
Center Width, Sound Program menu .......................................... 97
Changing speaker impedance...................................................... 18
CINEMA DSP 3D mode............................................................. 46
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Option menu ..................................... 54
CINEMA DSP indicator ............................................................. 10
Clear All Preset ..................................................................... 60, 66
Clear Preset ........................................................................... 60, 66
COAXIAL jack ........................................................................... 21
COMPONENT VIDEO jack....................................................... 21
Compressed Music Enhancer...................................................... 47
Configuration, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................... 100
Connect, Option menu ................................................................ 55
Connecting speakers.................................................................... 17
Connecting to network ................................................................ 32
Connections................................................................................. 13
Content window .......................................................................... 56
Control Select, HDMI Setup ..................................................... 106
Cursor indicators ......................................................................... 10
D
Decode Type, Sound Program menu .................................... 96, 97
Decoder Mode, Input menu......................................................... 88
Dialogue Lift, Option menu ........................................................ 54
Dimension, Sound Program menu .............................................. 97
Direct number access mode ........................................................ 63
Direct, Sound Program menu...................................................... 96
Disconnect, Option menu............................................................ 55
Display Set, Function Setup...................................................... 110
Distance, Speaker Setup............................................................ 101
DMC Control, Input menu .......................................................... 88
DSP Level, Sound Program menu .............................................. 94
DVD player connection............................................................... 25
Dynamic Range, Sound Setup................................................... 103
E
Enhancer, Input menu ................................................................. 89
Extended Surround, Option menu............................................... 55
External component connection .................................................. 21
External decoder connection ....................................................... 29
F
FIRM UPDATE, Advanced Setup menu .................................. 120
FM antenna connection ............................................................... 33
FM Mode..................................................................................... 59
FM tuning .................................................................................... 57
Front panel..................................................................................... 8
Front panel display ...................................................................... 10
Front Presence L Level, Sound Program menu........................... 96
Front Presence R Level, Sound Program menu .......................... 97
Front speaker ............................................................................... 13
Function Setup........................................................................... 109
G
Game connection......................................................................... 29
H
HDMI Control function............................................................. 121
HDMI Control, HDMI Setup .................................................... 106
HDMI indicator ........................................................................... 10
HDMI jack................................................................................... 21
HDMI monitor, Information menu............................................ 113
HDMI Setup .............................................................................. 105
High-frequency sound adjustment............................................... 43
I
Information menu ...................................................................... 113
INIT, Advanced Setup menu..................................................... 120
Initial Delay, Sound Program menu ............................................ 94
Initial Volume, Sound Setup ..................................................... 104
Input menu................................................................................... 86
Input menu list............................................................................. 87
Internet Radio .............................................................................. 69
IP Address, Network setup........................................................ 108
iPhone™ playback ...................................................................... 79
iPod Interlock, Input menu.......................................................... 89
En
141
APPENDIX
Index
iPod wireless system .................................................................... 81
iPod™ playback........................................................................... 79
J
Jack .............................................................................................. 21
L
Language.................................................................................... 112
Level, Speaker Setup ................................................................. 101
Lipsync, Sound Setup ................................................................ 103
Liveness, Sound Program menu .................................................. 95
Load, SCENE menu..................................................................... 91
Low-frequency sound adjustment................................................ 43
M
MAC Address Filter, Network setup ......................................... 108
Manual Preset............................................................................... 57
Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ...................................................... 99
Manual Tuning............................................................................. 59
Max Volume, Sound Setup ........................................................ 103
Memory Guard, Function Setup ................................................ 112
Menu browse control ................................................................... 80
MON.CHK, Advanced Setup menu........................................... 120
Multi information display ............................................................ 10
Multi Zone ................................................................................. 109
Multi-format player connection ................................................... 29
Multi-zone function ................................................................... 125
MUTE indicator ........................................................................... 10
N
Network connection ..................................................................... 32
NETWORK port .......................................................................... 32
Network setup ............................................................................ 108
Network Standby, Network setup .............................................. 108
Network, Information menu....................................................... 114
Normal tuning .............................................................................. 57
Now Playing view........................................................................ 56
O
ON SCREEN menu.....................................................................
On-screen display........................................................................
OPTICAL jack ............................................................................
Option menu................................................................................
Option menu list..........................................................................
50
12
21
52
53
P
Pairing, Option menu .................................................................. 55
Panorama, Sound Program menu................................................ 97
Parametric EQ, Speaker Setup .................................................. 102
Party Mode Set, Multi Zone...................................................... 109
PC................................................................................................ 67
PHONES jack................................................................................ 8
Play Control, DOCK (iPod) ........................................................ 81
Play Control, Internet Radio ....................................................... 70
Play Control, PC.................................................................... 68, 74
Play Control, Rhapsody .............................................................. 74
Play Control, SIRIUS Internet Radio.......................................... 77
Portable audio player connection ................................................ 29
Power Amp Assign, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup .................... 99
PREOUT connection................................................................... 30
Presence speaker ......................................................................... 13
Presence speaker layout .............................................................. 15
Preset Select ................................................................................ 59
Pure Direct mode......................................................................... 47
R
Radio Control .............................................................................. 65
Rear panel...................................................................................... 9
Remote control ............................................................................ 11
Remote control battery installation ............................................... 7
Remote control connection ......................................................... 30
Remote control, Controlling other components ........................ 115
REMOTE ID, Advanced Setup menu ....................................... 119
Remove Account, Input menu..................................................... 89
Rename/Icon Select, Input menu ................................................ 88
Rename/Icon Select, Scene menu ............................................... 92
Repeat, Option menu................................................................... 55
Reset, Scene menu....................................................................... 92
Resolution, Processing, Video Setup ........................................ 105
Reverb Delay, Sound Program menu .......................................... 95
Reverb Level, Sound Program menu .......................................... 96
Reverb Time, Sound Program menu ........................................... 95
Rhapsody Trial, Input menu........................................................ 89
Rhapsody®................................................................................... 71
Room Size, Sound Program menu .............................................. 94
S
Satellite Radio ............................................................................. 61
Save, SCENE menu..................................................................... 91
SCENE function .......................................................................... 44
SCENE menu .............................................................................. 90
Setup menu .................................................................................. 98
Shortcut function ......................................................................... 78
Shuffle, Option menu .................................................................. 55
Sign In, Input menu ..................................................................... 89
SILENT CINEMA mode............................................................. 46
Simple remote control ................................................................. 81
SIRIUS Internet Radio ................................................................ 75
SIRIUS Satellite Radio................................................................ 61
SiriusConnect™ tuner ................................................................. 61
Sound program ............................................................................ 44
Sound Program menu .................................................................. 93
Sound Setup............................................................................... 103
SP IMP., Advanced Setup menu ............................................... 118
Speaker connection...................................................................... 13
Speaker indicators ....................................................................... 10
Speaker layout ............................................................................. 14
Speaker setting ............................................................................ 34
Speaker Setup .............................................................................. 99
SR PIN, Advanced Setup menu ................................................ 119
Standby Charge, Input menu ....................................................... 89
Standby Through, HDMI Setup ................................................ 107
Straight Decoding Mode ............................................................. 45
Subwoofer ................................................................................... 13
Supplied accessories...................................................................... 7
Surround Back Initial Delay, Sound Program menu................... 94
Surround Back L Level, Sound Program menu .......................... 96
En
142
APPENDIX
Index
Surround Back Liveness, Sound Program menu ......................... 95
Surround Back R Level, Sound Program menu........................... 96
Surround Back Room Size, Sound Program menu ...................... 94
Surround back speaker ................................................................. 13
Surround Initial Delay, Sound Program menu............................. 94
Surround L Level, Sound Program menu .................................... 96
Surround Liveness, Sound Program menu................................... 95
Surround R Level, Sound Program menu .................................... 96
Surround Room Size, Sound Program menu ............................... 94
Surround speaker ......................................................................... 13
Z
Zone Rename, Multi Zone setup............................................... 109
Zone2 Set, Multi Zone .............................................................. 109
T
Test Tone, Speaker Setup .......................................................... 102
Tone control ................................................................................. 43
Tone Control, Option menu ......................................................... 54
Trigger connection ....................................................................... 31
Trigger Output, Function Setup ................................................. 111
Tuner indicators ........................................................................... 10
TV Audio Input, HDMI Setup ................................................... 106
TV FORMAT, Advanced Setup menu ...................................... 120
TV monitor connection ................................................................ 22
V
VERSION, Advanced Setup menu ............................................ 120
VIDEO AUX input cover .............................................................. 7
Video information, Information menu ....................................... 113
VIDEO jack ................................................................................. 21
Video Out, Input menu ................................................................ 89
Video Setup................................................................................ 104
Virtual CINEMA DSP 3D mode ................................................. 46
Virtual CINEMA DSP mode ....................................................... 46
VOLUME ...................................................................................... 8
VOLUME indicator ..................................................................... 10
Volume Trim, Option menu......................................................... 55
Y
YPAO........................................................................................... 34
En
143
© 2010 Yamaha Corporation
YD000A0/OMEN
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.6
Linearized : Yes
Encryption : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Page Mode : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit : 3.1-702
Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Create Date : 2010:07:20 13:03:35Z
Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.1
Modify Date : 2010:09:23 09:15:59-07:00
Metadata Date : 2010:09:23 09:15:59-07:00
Format : application/pdf
Title :
Creator : .
Document ID : uuid:717c67e6-5b97-4b3e-a58e-8acee02754e7
Instance ID : uuid:115c8ce4-3451-47f4-9ae7-7de97419da13
Has XFA : No
Page Count : 144
Page Layout : SinglePage
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools